Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

command+power

  • 1 σκηπτουχία

    A bearing of a staff or sceptre as the badge of command, hence military command, esp. of the Persians,

    ἐπὶ σκηπτουχίᾳ ταχθείς A.Pers. 297

    ; technically, rank or province of a Persian σκηπτοῦχος (v. sq. 2), Str.11.2.18.
    2 generally, command, power, Lyc.111.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σκηπτουχία

  • 2 ἐξουσία

    ἐξουσία, ας, ἡ (Soph., Thu.+; ins, pap, LXX, En, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., Just.; Tat. 30, 1; Mel., P. 104, 810 [Bodm.]) from ἔξεστιν.
    ① a state of control over someth., freedom of choice, right (e.g., the ‘right’ to act, decide, or dispose of one’s property as one wishes: BGU 1158, 13 [9 B.C.] = Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 234, 13 legal t.t., esp. in wills: POxy 272, 13; BGU 183, 25 ἔχειν αὐτὴν τὴν ἐ. τῶν ἰδίων πάντων; PTebt 319, 21.—Sir 30:11) ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν have the right 2 Th 3:9 (Just., D 16, 4). W. inf. foll. (Teles p. 23, 14; 24, 11; Tob 2:13 S; 7:10 S) J 10:18; 1 Cor 9:4ff; Hb 13:10; Rv 13:5; B 4:2. W. obj. gen. foll. (τίς οὖν ἔτι ἔχει μου ἐξουσίαν; Epict. 3, 24, 70; διδόναι ἐξουσίαν τῶν πετεινῶν Did., Gen. 61, 24) εἰ ἄλλοι τῆς ὑμῶν ἐ. μετέχουσι 1 Cor 9:12. Also ἐ. ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον τῆς ζωῆς the right to the tree of life Rv 22:14. W. verbs of two constr. ἔχει ἐ. ὁ κεραμεὺς τοῦ πηλοῦ ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ φυράματος the potter has a right over the clay, to make fr. the same lump Ro 9:21. ἐ. ἔχειν περί τινος (4 Macc 4:5) be at liberty w. regard to a thing (opp. ἀνάγκην ἔχειν) 1 Cor 7:37; cp. 8:9; ἐ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ a right in the gospel 9:18. ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐ. ὑπῆρχεν was at your disposal Ac 5:4 (Esth 4:17b; Appian, Liby. 52 §226 ἐν ἐ. εἶναι τί τινι=someth. is at someone’s disposal, is within one’s power).
    ② potential or resource to command, control, or govern, capability, might, power (on capacity for someth. cp. Did., Gen. 162, 5: ἡ προσαιρέσεως ἐξουσία; cp. 1 Esdr 4:28, 40; 2 Macc 7:16 the king can do what he pleases because he has the capability for doing so) ἡ ἐ. τ. ἵππων ἐν τ. στόματι αὐτῶν ἐστιν Rv 9:19; cp. vs. 3; 13:2, 4; 18:1; Mt 9:8; Ac 8:19. W. inf. foll. to indicate the thing that one is able to do (En 25:4 ἅψασθαι; Diod S 4, 52, 4 ἀμύνασθαι εἶχεν ἐξουσίαν; Mel., P. 104 πάντα κρίνει); ἐκβάλλειν τ. δαιμόνια [b]Mk 3:15. ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τ. γέενναν Lk 12:5; cp. J 1:12; 7:1 v.l.; Rv 9:10; 11:6. W. gen. of the inf. foll. τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω ὄφεων Lk 10:19; ποιεῖν ἐ. exercise power Rv 13:12. ἐ. ἔχειν τινός have power over someone (Epict. 4, 12, 8) GPt 3:7; ἑαυτοῦ IPol 7:3; also ἐ. ἔχειν ἐπί τινος Rv 20:6; cp. AcPl Ha 1, 3. Esp. of God’s power (Theodor. Prodr. 5, 313 ἡ θεῶν ἐ.; Da 4:17; Jos., Ant. 5, 109; 18, 214) Lk 12:5 (cp. 2 Cl 5:4); Ac 1:7; Jd 25; Hs 9, 23, 4. πάντων τ. ἐξουσίαν power over all Hm 4, 1, 11; Hs 9, 28, 8. πᾶσα ἡ ἐ. 5, 7, 3 (En 9:5). τὴν κατὰ πάντων ἐ. MPol. 2:1. τέλους ἐ. power over the end PtK 2 p. 13, 22. ἐ. ἐπὶ τ. πληγάς control over the plagues Rv 16:9. Also of Satan’s power Ac 26:18; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.; B 2:1.—The power that comes fr. God can involve transcendent knowledge, and both may be expressed by ἐ. (Herm. Wr. 1, 13; 14; 32). So his hearers conclude fr. Jesus’ teaching that he must have ἐ. (i.e. it is not necessary for him to first ask what the traditional practice or interpretation requires) Mk 1:22 (‘license’ of a Jewish teacher L-S-J-M Suppl., ’68; against this AArgyle, ET 80, ’68/69, 343); cp. Mt 7:29 (Rtzst., Poim. 48, 3, Mysterienrel.3 302; 363; JStarr, HTR 23, 1930, 302–5; HWindisch, Pls. u. Christus ’34, 151ff; DDaube, JTS 39, ’38, 45–59; HFlowers, ET 66, ’55, 254 [‘like a king’]; DHudson, ET 67, ’55/56, 17; JCoutts, JTS 8, ’57, 111–18 [Jesus and the 12]). The prep. expr. κατʼ ἐξουσίαν in accordance w. knowledge and power Mk 1:27 and ἐν ἐ. Lk 4:32 belong to this classification; cp. 4:36. The close relation of ἐ. w. ‘gnosis’ and teaching also B 18:1.—But it is not always possible to draw a hard and fast line betw. this sense and
    ③ the right to control or command, authority, absolute power, warrant (Sextus 36: the πιστός has ἐ. fr. God) ἐ. καὶ ἐπιτροπή (cp. Ps.-Pla., Defin. p. 415c ἐξουσία, ἐπιτροπὴ νόμου) authority and commission Ac 26:12. ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς; by whose authority are you doing this? Mt 21:23, 24, 27; Mk 11:28, 29, 33; Lk 20:2, 8. ἐ. διδόναι τινί put someone in charge (Diod S 13, 36, 2; 14, 81, 6; cp. Vi. Aesopi G 11 p. 39, 6 P.; En 9:7; TestJob 3:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 90; 20, 193) Mk 13:34; PtK 2 p. 14, 13. οἷς ἔδωκεν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὴν ἐ. to whom he gave rights over the Gospel (for its proclamation) B 8:3. ὅτι τὸ ἄρχειν ἐξουσίας ἐστίν that ruling depends on authority 6:18. Of apostolic authority 2 Cor 10:8; 13:10; ISm 4:1. Of Jesus’ total authority Mt 28:18 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 32; Da 7:14; DStanley, CBQ 29, ’67, 555–73); Hs 5, 6, 1. W. gen. of the one who has authority ἐ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ Rv 12:10 (Just., A I, 40, 7). W. gen. of that over which the authority is exercised (Diod S 2, 27, 3; IDefixWünsch 4, 21; Ps 135:8, 9; Wsd 10:14; Sir 17:2; Jos., Vi. 190) ἐ. πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων over the unclean spirits Mt 10:1; Mk 6:7; cp. J 17:2; Hm 4, 3, 5; PtK 2 p. 14, 13; 1 Cl 61:2; ISm 4:1; τούτου τοῦ λαοῦ Hs 8, 3, 3. Also ἐπί w. acc. (cp. Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; cp. Rv 6:8; 13:7. Likew. ἐπί w. gen. (cp. Da 3:97) Rv 2:26; 11:6b; 14:18. παρά τινος (also ἀπό τινος Orig., C. Cels. 2, 13, 56) indicates the source of the authority (s. παρά A3b) Ac 9:14; 26:10; Hs 5, 6, 4 (restored from the Lat.; ἐ. λαμβάνειν as Diod S 11, 42, 6; TestJob 8:2f; 16:4; Vi. Aesopi G 11 p. 39, 4 P.) and κατά τινος the one against whom it is directed (TestJob 16:2 κατʼ ἐμοῦ; 8:2 κατὰ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μου ‘over my possessions’; Sb 8316, 6f κύριε Σάραπι δὸς αὐτῷ κατεξουσίαν κατὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν αὐτοῦ; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 43, 25) J 19:11 (HvCampenhausen, TLZ 73, ’48, 387–92); B 4:13. W. pres. inf. foll. (cp. X., Mem. 2, 6, 24 and 35; Diod S 12, 75, 4; 1 Macc 10:35; 11:58; Jos., Ant. 4, 247) Mt 9:6; Mk 2:10; Lk 5:24; J 5:27. W. aor. inf. foll. (Jdth 8:15; 1 Esdr 8:22; 1 Macc 1:13) 19:10. Foll. by gen. of the pres. inf. (4 Macc 5:15) Hm 12, 4, 2.—RDillon, ‘As One Having Authority’ (Mark 1:22): CBQ 57, ’95, 92–113.
    ④ power exercised by rulers or others in high position by virtue of their office, ruling power, official power (Ps.-Pla., Alc. 1, 135b al.; LXX; Jos., Bell. 2, 140, Vi. 80) ἐ. ὡς βασιλεύς Rv 17:12f (Diod S 2, 45, 1 βασιλικὴν ἐ. ἔχειν; 14, 32, 5 ἐ. λαμβάνειν); ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος Lk 20:20; cp. J 19:10f, s. 3 above. ἐ. ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων Lk 19:17. ἄνθρωπος ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος a man under authority 7:8 (MFrost, ET 45, ’34, 477f); cp. Mt 8:9; Hs 1:3.—The power of a particular office (Diod S 1, 70, 1; 14, 113, 6 ἡ ὑπατικὴ ἐξουσία; Plut., Mar. 406 [2, 1], Caes. 734 [58, 1]) ἐπαρχικὴ ἐ. the power of prefect Phlm subscr.
    ⓐ human authorities, officials, government (Dionys. Hal. 8, 44; 11, 32; POxy 261, 15) Lk 12:11 (here and elsewh. in NT w. ἀρχή, as also in Pla.); Ro 13:1, 2, 3 (with 13:1b cp. the express. ‘ancient saying’ [s. Hes., Theogony 96 ἐκ δὲ Διὸς βασιλῆες. On this HFränkel, Dichtung u. Philos. des frühen Griechentums ’62, 111 n. 6] in Artem. 2, 36 p. 135, 24; 2, 69 p. 161, 17 τὸ κρατοῦν δύναμιν ἔχει θεοῦ=the ruling power has its authority from God; Wsd 6:3; Jos., Bell. 2, 140 οὐ δίχα θεοῦ περιγενέσθαι τινὶ τὸ ἄρχειν … ἐξουσίαν); Tit 3:1. For the view that the ἐ. of Ro 13 are spirit powers, as b below, s. OCullmann, Christ and Time (tr. Filson) ’50, 191–210.—On the subj. in gener. s. LGaugusch, D. Staatslehre d. Ap. Pls nach Ro 13: ThGl 5, ’34, 529–50; JUitman, Onder Eig. Vaandel 15, ’40, 102–21; HvCampenhausen, ABertholet Festschr. ’50, 97–113; OCullmann, Zur neuesten Diskussion über die ἐξουσίαι in Rö 13:1: TZ 10, ’54, 321–36, D. Staat im NT ’612 (Eng. tr.: The State in the NT ’56, 93–114); against him AStrobel, ZNW 47, ’56, 67–93.—GCaird, Princip. and Powers ’56; RMorgenthaler TZ 12, ’56, 289–304; CMorrison, The Powers That Be ’60; EBarnikol, Rö 13. Der nichtpaulinische Ursprung der absoluten Obrigkeitsbejahung v. Rö 13:1–7 ’61, 65–133; HSchlier, Principalities and Powers in the NT ’61 (Eng. tr.); MBorg, NTS 19, ’72/73, 205–18. οἱ ἐπʼ ἐξουσίαν ἀχθέντες those who are brought before the authorities Hs 9, 28, 4.
    ⓑ of transcendent rulers and functionaries: powers of the spirit world (TestLevi 3:8; TestSol 20:15 B), sg. (w. ἀρχή and δύναμις) 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 1:21; Col 2:10. Pl. (w. ἀρχαί as Just., D. 41, 1; cp. Orig., C. Cels. 4, 29, 22) Eph 3:10; 6:12; Col 1:16; 2:15; (w. ἄγγελοι, δυνάμεις) 1 Pt 3:22. Cp. the v.l. for ἄρχειν Papias (4).
    ⑥ the sphere in which power is exercised, domain (4 Km 20:13; Ps 113:2) Lk 4:6. ἐκ τ. ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου ἐστίν he comes fr. Herod’s jurisdiction 23:7. ἐ. τοῦ σκότους domain of darkness 22:53; Col 1:13 (opp. the βασιλεία of Christ). Hence ἐ. τοῦ ἀέρος simply domain of the air Eph 2:2; s. ἀήρ 2b.
    ⑦ Various opinions are held about the mng. of 1 Cor 11:10 ὀφείλει ἡ γυνὴ ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς διὰ τοὺς ἀγγέλους. Many now understand it as a means of exercising power (cp. δύναμις 1b.—It is abstract for concrete, as βασιλεία [1] in Diod S 1, 47, 5: a stone figure ἔχουσα τρεῖς βασιλείας ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς=that wears three symbols of royal power [diadems] on its head), that is to say, the veil (κάλυμμα is v.l. for ἐ. here; s. critical apparatus in N.) by which women at prayer (when they draw near to the heavenly realm) protect themselves fr. the amorous glances of certain angels. But the veil may also have been simply a symbol of womanly dignity, esp. befitting a Christian woman, and esp. in the presence of holy angels (s. Cadbury below).—WWeber, ZWT 46, 1903, 487–99; Dibelius, Geisterwelt 12–23 al.; EFehrle, Die kultische Keuschheit im Altertum1910, 39; RPerdelwitz, StKr 86, 1913, 611–13; LBrun, ZNW 14, 1913, 298–308; GKittel, Rabbinica 1920, 17ff; Billerb. III 423–35; KBornhäuser, NKZ 41, 1930, 475–88; WFoerster, ZNW 30, ’31, 185f; MGinsburger, RHPR 12, ’32, 245–47; OMotta, ET 44, ’33, 139–41; CSpicq, RB 48, ’39, 557–62; EBlakeney, ET 55, ’44, 138; SLösch, TQ 127, ’47, 216–61; JFitzmyer, NTS 3, ’57, 48–58; HCadbury, HTR 51, ’58, 1f (Qumran parallels); MHooker, NTS 10, ’64, 410–16; AIsaksson, Marriage and Ministry in the NT ’65, 176–81; GSchwartz, ZNW 70, ’79, 249 (Aramaic background).—LCerfaux et JTondriau, Un Concurrent du Christianisme, ’57. S. on ἄγγελος 2c.—V.l. for ἄρχειν Papias (4).—DELG s.v. εἰμί. New Docs 2, 83f. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐξουσία

  • 3 ἐπί

    ἐπί, Thess. (before τ)
    A

    ἐτ IG9(2).517.14

     (iii B. C.), Prep. with gen., dat., and acc., to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
    A WITH GEN.:
    I of Place,
    1 with Verbs of Rest, upon,

    καθέζετ' ἐ. θρόνου Il.1.536

    ;

    ἧστο.. ὑψοῦ ἐπ' ἀκροτάτης κορυφῆς 13.12

    ;

    ἐ. πύργου ἔστη 16.700

    ;

    κεῖται ἐ. χθονός 20.345

    : without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ' ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (sc. σταθέντα)

    ἐλήλατο 10.153

    ; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ' ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, 1.46; ἐ. γῆς, opp. ὑπὸ γῆς, Pl.Lg. 728a: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ' ἵππων on our chariot, Il.24.356;

    οὐκ ἂν ἐφ' ὑμετ έρων ὀχέων.. ἵκεσθον 8.455

    ;

    ἄγαγε.. δῶρ' ἐπ' ἀπήνης 24.447

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης.. ὠχέετο Hdt.1.31

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων ὀχεῖσθαι X.Cyr.4.5.58

    ;

    οὓς κῆρες φορέουσι.. ἐ. νηῶν Il.8.528

    ;

    πέμπειν τινὰς ἐ. τριήροιν X.HG5.4.56

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ὤμου.. φέρειν Od.10.170

    ; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ' ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, Numen. ap. Eus.PE14.7; βαδιοῦνται ἐ. δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ' ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, Pl.Smp. 190d; ἐπ' ἄκρων ὁδοιπορεῖν walk on tiptoe, S.Aj. 1230; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support,

    νέρθε κἀπὶ γῆς ἄνω Id.OT 416

    ; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, X.An.1.8.9,3.2.36; but most freq., in, rarely in Hom., ἐπ' ἀγροῦ in the country. Od. 1.190;

    γᾶς ἐ. ξένας S.OC 1705

     (lyr.);

    νήσου τῆσδ' ἐφ' ἧς ναίει Id.Ph. 613

    ;

    ἐ. ξένας δμωῒς ἐπ' ἀλλοτρίας πόλεος E.Andr. 137

     (lyr.);

    οἱ ἐ. Θρᾴκης σύμμαχοι Th.5.35

    ;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῆς Ἀσίας κατοικοῦντας Isoc.12.103

    ; ἐπ' οἰκήματος κατίσαι, καθῆσθαι, in a brothel, Hdt.2.121.έ, Pl. Chrm. 163b;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῶν οἰκημάτων καθεζομένους Aeschin.1.74

    ;

    ἐ. τῶν ἐργαστηρίων καθίζειν Isoc.7.15

    ; μένειν ἐ. τῆς αὐτῶν (sc. χώρας ) remain in statu quo, Indut. ap. Th.4.118;

    οἱ ἐπ' ἐρημίας λῃστεύοντες Jul. Or.7.210a

    ; later of towns,

    ἐπ' Ἀλεξανδρείας BGU908.16

     (ii A.D.), etc.; sts. also, at or near, ἐπ' αὐτάων (sc. τῶν πηγῶν) Il.22.153;

    κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Ποσιδηΐου Hdt.7.115

    ; αἱ ἐ. Λήμνου ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι off Lemnos, ib.6 codd.; τὰ ἐ. Θρᾴκης the Thrace- ward region, Th.1.59, cf. IG12.45.17, etc.; ποταμοὶ ἐφ' ὧν ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι.. on, i.e. near which.., X.An.2.5.18; ἐ. τῶν τραπεζῶν at the money-changers' tables, Pl.Ap. 17c; in Geom., αἱ ἐφ' ὧν AA BB [ γραμμαί] the lines AA BB, Arist.EN 1132b6, etc.; ἕλιξ ἐφ' ἇς τὰ ΑΒΓΔ a spiral ABCD, Archim.Spir.13 (cf. B.1.1k); also ἐ. τοῦ βάτου in the passage concerning the bush, Ev.Marc.12.26.
    2 in various relations not strictly local, μένειν ἐ. τῆς ἀρχῆς remain in the command, X.Ages.1.37; μένειν ἐ. τινος abide by it, D.4.9; ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων, ἐ. τοῦ πολεμεῖν εἶναι, to be engaged in.., Id.15.11, Prooem.1; ἐ. ὀνόματος εἶναι bear a name, Id.39.21;

    ἔχεται πόλις ἐ. νόσου S.Ant. 1141

     (lyr.).
    b of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ' ἀγκύρας ride at (i.e. in dependence upon an) anchor, Hdt.7.188; ἐ. προσπόλου μιᾶς χωρεῖν dependent upon an attendant, S.OC 746.
    c with the personal and reflexive Pron., once in Hom.,

    εὔχεσθε.. σιγῇ ἐφ' ὑμείων Il.7.195

    ; later mostly with [ per.] 3rd pers., ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν κεῖσθαι by themselves, Hdt.2.2, cf. 8.32;

    οἰκέειν κώμην Id.5.98

    ;

    ἐ. σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτόνομοι οἰκεῖν Th.2.63

    ;

    ἵζεσθαι Hdt.9.17

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν πλεῖν Th.8.8

    ; ἐπ' ὑμέων αὐτῶν βαλέσθαι consider it by yourselves, Hdt.3.71, etc.;

    αὐτὴ ἐφ' αὑτῆς σκοποῦσα Th.6.40

    ;

    ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸν ἐξετασμὸν ποιεῖσθαι D.18.16

    ; ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν διαλέγονται speak in a dialect of their own, Hdt. 1.142; also

    αὐτοὶ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν χωρεῖν X. An.2.4.10

    ;

    πράττειν Pl.Prt. 326d

    , cf. Sph. 217c; τὸ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν μόνον προορώμενοι considering their own interest only, th.1.17.
    d with numerals, to denote the depth of a body of soldiers, ἐ. τεττάρων ταχφῆναι to be drawn up four deep, four in file, X.An.1.2.15, etc.; ἐ. πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι, of the Thebansat Leuctra, Id.HG 6.4.12; ἐπ' ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι, i.e. in a long thin line, Id.An.4.8.11;

    οὐκ ἐπ' ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην Th.7.79

    ; ἐφ' ἑνὸς ἄγειν in single file, X.Cyr.2.4.2, cf. An.5.2.6; rarely of the length of the line,

    ἐ. τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς Th.2.90

    ; in X.,

    ἐγένοντο τὸ μέτωπον ἐ. τριακοσίων.. τὸ δὲ βάθος ἐφ' ἑκατόν Cyr.2.4.2

    ; πλεῖν ἐ. κέρως, ἐ. κέρας, v. infr. c.1.3; ἐ. φάλαγγος γίγνεται τὸ στράτευμα is formed in column, An.4.6.6, etc. (but in E.Ph. 1467, ἀσπίδων ἔπι is merely in or under arms): hence, generally, ἐ. ὀκτὼ πλίνθων τὸ εὖρος eight bricks wide, X.An.7.8.14.
    e c. gen. pers., before, in presence of,

    ἐ. μαρτύρων.. πράσσεταί τι Antipho 2.3.8

    ;

    ἐξελέγχεσθαι ἐ. πάντων D.25.36

    ; so, before a magistrate or official,

    ἐ. τοῦ στρατηγοῦ POxy. 38.11

     (i A.D.), cf. UPZ71.15 (ii B.C.), Ev.Matt.28.14;

    γράψομαί σε ἐ. Ῥαδαμάνθυος Luc.Cat.18

    ;

    τινὰ εἰς δίκην καὶ κρίσιν ἐ. τῶν στρατοπέδων προκαλεῖν Jul.Or.1.30d

    ;

    πίστεις δοῦναι ἐ. θεῶν D.H.5.29

    ; but ἐπὶ δικασταῖς is f.l. in D.19.243 (leg. ἔπη).
    f with Verbs of perceiving, observing, judging, etc., in the case of,

    ἐπὶ νούσων παντοίων ἐπύθοντο Emp.112.10

    ;

    ὁρᾶν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.3.9.3

    ;

    αἰσθάνεσθαί τι ἐ. τινος Pl.R. 406c

    , etc.;

    τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν ἐ. τινος Hyp.Eux.32

    ;

    τὰ συμβόλαια ἐ. τῶν νόμων σκοπεῖν D.18.210

    ; ἐπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων ἂν ἐσκόπει ib.233, cf. 25.2 (v.l.);

    ἐφ' ἑνός τι παριδεῖν Lycurg.64

    ;

    τὰς ἐναντιώσεις ἐ. μὲν τῶν λόγων τηροῦντες, ἐ. δὲ τῶν ἔργων μὴ καθορῶντες Isoc.13.7

    ;

    οὐδεὶς ἐφ' αὑτοῦ τὰ κακὰ συνορᾷ Men.631

    ;

    ἀγνοεῖν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.2.3.2

    ; also with Verbs of speaking, on a subject,

    λέγειν ἐ. τινος Pl.Chrm. 155d

    , R. 524e, etc.;

    ἐπιδεῖξαί τι ἐ. τινος Isoc.8.109

    ;

    ἵνα τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπ' αὐτῶν κοινοὺς ποιήσωμαι D.60.12

    .
    3 implying Motion:
    a where the sense of motion is lost in the sense of being supported, ὀρθωθεὶς.. ἐπ' ἀγκῶνος having raised himself upon his elbow, Il.10.80;

    ἐ. μελίης.. ἐρεισθείς 22.225

    ;

    τὴν μὲν.. καθεῖσεν ἐ. θρόνου 18.389

    .
    b in a pregnant sense, denoting the goal of motion (cf.

    εἰς A.1.2

    ,

    ἐν A.1.8

    ), νῆα.. ἐπ' ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, 1.485; περάαν νήσων ἔπι carry to the islands and leave there, 21.454, cf.22.45;

    ἐ. τῆς γῆς καταπίπτειν X.Cyr.4.5.54

    ; ἀναβῆναι ἐ. τῶν πύργων ib.7.1.39;

    ἐπ' Ἀβύδου ἀφικομέναις Th.8.79

     (v.l.); freq. of motion towards or (in a military sense) upon a place,

    προτρέποντο μελαινάων ἐ. νηῶν Il.5.700

    ;

    τρέσσε.. ἐφ' ὁμίλου 11.546

     (but νήσου ἔ. Ψυρίης νέεσθαι to go near Psyria, Od.3.171); ἐπ' οἴκου ἀπελαύνειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρεῖν, homewards, Hdt.2.121.δ, Th.1.30,87, etc.; also with names of places,

    ἰέναι ἐ. Κυζίκου Hdt.4.14

    ;

    πλεῖν ἐ. Χίου Id.1.164

    , cf. 168; ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ' αἰγύπτου ib. 1;

    ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἐ. Θεσσαλίης Id.5.64

    ; ὁ κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Παγασέων φέρων the bay that leads to Pagasae, Id.7.193; ἡ ἐ. βαβυλῶνος ὁδός the road leading to B., X.Cyr. 5.3.45, cf.An.6.3.24.
    c metaph., ἐ. γνώμης τινὸς γίγνεσθαι come to an opinion, D.4.7;

    ἐπ' ἐλπίδος γενέσθαι Plu.Sol.14

    ; ὡς ἐ. κινδύνου as if to meet danger, Th.6.34;

    ἐ. τοῦ ἀλύπως ζῆν

     with a view to..,

    Pl.Prt. 358b

    ; cf. infr. B. 111.2.
    II of Time, in the time of,

    ἐ. προτέρων ἀνθρώπων Il.5.637

    ,23.332;

    ἐ. Κρόνου Hes.Op. 111

    ; ἐ. Κέκροπος, ἐ. Δαρείου, etc., Hdt.8.44,6.98, etc.;

    ἐ. τῶν τριάκοντα Lys.13.2

    ;

    ὀλιγαρχία ἡ ἐ. τῶν τετρακοσίων καταστᾶσα Isoc.8.108

    ; ἐ. τούτου τυραννεύοντος, ἐ. Λέοντος βασιλεύοντος, ἐ. Μήδων ἀρχόντων, etc., Hdt.1.15,65, 134, etc.;

    ἐ. τῆς ἐμῆς βασιλείας Isoc.3.32

    ; ἐπ' ἐμεῦ in my time, Hdt.1.5, 2.46, etc.;

    ἡ εἰρήνη ἡ ἐπ' Ἀνταλκίδου D.20.54

    , cf. X.HG5.1.36;

    αἱ ἐπ' Ἀσδρούβα γενόμεναι ὁμολογίαι Plb.3.15.5

    ; ἐπ' εἰρήνης in time of peace, Il.2.797, 9.403;

    ἐπ' ἐμῆς νεότητος Ar.Ach. 211

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Th.6.6

    ; ἐπ' ἡμέρης ἑκάστης v.l. for -ῃ -τῃ in Hdt.5.117.
    b later ἐ. δείπνου at dinner, Luc.Asin.3; ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης, ἐφ' ἑκάστης κύλικος, Plu.Alex.23; ἐ. τῆς κύλικος, ἐ. τοῦ ποτηρίου, Luc.Pisc.34, Plu.Alex.53.
    III in various causal senses:
    1 over, of persons in authority,

    ἐπ' οὗ ἐτάχθημεν Hdt.5.109

    ; οἱ ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων the public officers, D.18.247; freq. in forged decrees, ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὅπλων στρατηγός ib.38; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, τῶν ἱππέων, ib.116; ὁ ἐ. τῆς διοικήσεως ib.38 (but cf. c. 111.3); τοῦ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν is f.l. in Lys. 32.5;

    ὁ ἐ. τῆς χώρας στρατηγός Plu.Phoc.32

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. τῶν σιτοποιῶν καὶ μαγείρων Id.Alex.23

    ;

    ὁ ἐ. τοῦ οἴνου Id.Pyrrh.5

    ; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τοῦ Ὄθωνος, = Lat. ab epistulis, his secretary, Id.Oth.9; cf. B. 111.6.
    2 κεκλῆσθαι ἐ. τινος to be called after him, Hdt.4.45;

    ἐ. τινος μετονομασθῆναι Id.1.94

    :

    ἐ. τινος τὰς ἐπωνυμίας ἔχειν Id.4.107

    ; ἐ. τινος ἐπώνυμος γίγνεσθαι ib. 184; also

    ἐπ' ὀνόματος καλεῖν Plb.5.35.2

    .
    3 of occasions, circumstances, and conditions, οὐκ ἐ. τούτου μόνον, ἀλλ' ἐ. πάντων, on all occasions, D.21.38, cf. 183;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστων Pl.Phlb. 25e

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκατέρου Id.Tht. 159c

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστης μαντείας D.21.54

    ; ἐπ' ἐξουσίας καὶ πλούτου πονηρὸν εἶναι in.. ib.138; ἐ. τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ib.72, cf. 18.17;

    τὴν ἐ. τῆς πομπῆς καὶ τοῦ μεθύειν πρόφασιν λαβών Id.21.180

    ;

    ἐ. σχολῆς Aeschin.3.191

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀδείας Plu. Sol.22

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀληθείας Ev.Marc.12.14

    , POxy.255.16 (i A.D.): hence in adverbial phrases, ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. μοίρας) equally, S.El. 1062 (lyr.);

    ἐ. καιροῦ D.20.90

    ; ἐπ' ἐσχάτων at the last, LXXDe.17.7 (v.l. ἐσχάτῳ) ; ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος for the present, SIG543.6 (Epist. Philipp.).
    4 in respect of,

    ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων Arist.Pol. 1280a17

    , cf. EN 1131b18; concerning,

    τὰ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἐνεστηκότα PTeb.7.6

     (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DAT.:
    I of Place, upon, just like the gen. (hence Poets use whichever case suits the metre, whereas in Prose the dat. is more freq.):
    1 with Verbs of Rest,

    ἕζεο τῷδ' ἐ. δίφρῳ Il.6.354

    ;

    ἧντ' ἐ. πύργῳ 3.153

    ;

    στῆ δ' ἐ... νηΐ 8.222

    ;

    κεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι X.An.1.8.27

    ; καίειν ἐ. πᾶσι (sc. βωμοῖς) Il.8.240;

    ἔβραχε χαλκὸς ἐ. στήθεσσι 4.420

    ;

    ἐ. χθονὶ δέρκεσθαι 1.88

    , etc.: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something,

    νηυσὶν ἐπ' ὠκυπόροισιν ἔβαινον 2.351

     (v.l. for ἐν)

    ; ἐπ' ὤμοις φέρειν E.Ph. 1131

     (but ἐφ' ἵππῳ, ἐφ' ἵπποις and the like are never used for ἐφ' ἵππου, etc.); of places, mostly in,

    ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ Hdt.5.77

    ;

    τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμα S.Ph. 353

    ;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάτοις τόποις Id.Tr. 1100

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ ψυχῇ δάκνομαι Id.Ant. 317

    ; also, at or near,

    ἐ. κρήνῃ Od.13.408

    ;

    ἐ. θύρῃσι Il.2.788

    , etc.; of rivers, etc., by, beside,

    ἐ. ὠκυρόῳ Κελάδοντι.. 7.133

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάρῃ Od.7.160

    ;

    ἐ. νηυσί Il.1.559

    , etc.; of persons, οὐ τἀπὶ Λυδοῖς οὐδ' ἐπ' Ὀμφάλῃ λατρεύματα in Lydia, in the power of O., S.Tr. 356.
    b on or over, ἐπ' Ἰφιδάμαντι over the body of Iphidamas, Il.11.261, cf. 4.470;

    τοιόνδ' ἐπ' ἀνδρὶ κομπάζεις λόγον A.Ag. 1400

    ; also, over or in honour of,

    ἐ. σοὶ κατέθηκε.. ἄεθλα Od.24.91

    ; [

    βοῦς] ἐ. Πατρόκλῳ πέφνεν Il. 23.776

    ;

    κειράμενοι χαίτας ἐπ' Ἀδώνιδι Bion 1.81

    , cf. Lys.2.80; in [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.sepulchral Inscrr., Schwyzer 348,al.
    c in hostile sense, against, Hdt.1.61,6.74, 88, S.Ph. 1139 (lyr.), etc.; as a check upon,

    οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐ. τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist.Pol. 1299b37

    , cf. 1271a39; also, towards, in reference to,

    ἐ. πᾶσι χόλον τελέσαι Il.4.178

    ;

    ἐπ' ἔργοις πᾶσι S.OC 1268

    ;

    δικαιότερος καὶ ἐπ' ἄλλῳ ἔσσεαι Il.19.181

    , cf. S.Tr. 994 (anap.), etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖς δυνατοῖς ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην Democr. 191

    ; τὸ ἐ. πᾶσιν τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος extending over all bodies, Pl. Smp. 210b; ἡ [παιδεία] ἡ ἐ. σώμασι, ἐ. ψυχῇ, Id.R. 376e; τἀπὶ σοὶ κακά the ills which lie upon thee, S.Ph. 806: in [dialect] Att. also, νόμον τίθεσθαι, θεῖναι ἐ. τινι, make a law for his case, whether for or against, Pl.Grg. 488d, Lexap.And.1.87;

    νόμους ἀναγράψαι ἐ. τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι D.24.5

    ; νόμος κεῖται ἐ. τινι ib.70; τἀπὶ τῷ πλήθει νενομοθετημένα ib.123, cf. 142; τί θεσμοποιεῖς ἐ. ταλαιπώρῳ νεκρῷ; E.Ph. 1645.
    d. of accumulation, upon, after, ὄγχνη ἐπ' ὄγχνῃ one pear after another, pear on pear, Od.7.120;

    ἐ. κέρδεϊ κέρδος Hes.Op. 644

    ;

    ἄτη ἑτέρα ἐπ' ἄτῃ A. Ch. 404

     (lyr.); πήματα ἐ. πήμασι, ἐ. νόσῳ νόσος, S.Ant. 595, OC 544 (both lyr.).
    e. in addition to, over and above, besides, οὐκ ἄρα σοί γ'

    ἐ. εἴδεϊ καὶ φρένες ἦσαν Od.17.454

    , cf. 308;

    ἄλλα τε πόλλ' ἐ. τῇσι παρίσχομεν Il.9.639

    , cf. Od.22.264; ἐ. τοῖσι besides, 24.277;

    ἐ. τούτοις Him.Or.14.10

    ; so of Numerals,

    τρισχιλίους ἐ. μυρίοις Plu.Publ.20

    , cf. Jul.Or.4.148c, etc.;

    γυναῖκ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν.. ἔχει E.Med. 694

    : with Verbs of eating and drinking, with,

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ πίνειν ὕδωρ X.Cyr.6.2.27

    ; νέκταρ

    ποτίσαι ἐπ' ἀμβροσίᾳ Pl.Phdr. 247e

    ; esp. of a relish, κάρδαμον μόνον

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    παίειν ἐφ' ἁλὶ τὰν μᾶδδαν Ar.Ach. 835

    : metaph., ἐ. τῷ φάγοις ἥδιστ' ἄν; ἐ. βαλλαντίῳ; Id.Eq. 707; later ἐ. γογγυλίσι διαβιῶναι live on turnips, Ath.10.419a.
    f. of position, after, behind, of soldiers, X.Cyr.8.3.16-18.
    g. in dependence upon, in the power of,

    τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ' ἀνδράσι κεῖται Pi.P.8.76

    ; ἐ. τινί ἐστι it is in his power to do, c.inf., Hdt.8.29, etc.;

    ἐ. σοί ἐστιν ἀναζωπυρεῖν M.Ant.7.2

    ;

    ἐ. ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι Th.6.22

    ; ἐ. τῷ πλήθει in their hands, S.OC66, cf. Th.2.84; τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ ἐ. ἐκείνῳ, etc., as far as is in my power, etc., X. Cyr.5.4.11, Isoc.4.142, etc.;

    τὸ ἐ. τούτοις εἶναι Lys.28.14

    ; ἐ. τοῖς υἱάσι their property, Leg.Gort.4.37.
    h. according to, ἐ. τοῖς νόμοις Lexap.D. 24.56;

    ἐ. πᾶσι δικαίοις ποιούμεθα τοὺς λόγους Id.20.88

    ;

    ἐ. προφάσει θηρός S.Tr. 662

     codd.(lyr.).
    i. of condition or circumstances in which one is,

    ἀτελευτήτῳ ἐ. ἔργῳ Il.4.175

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἀρρήτοις λόγοις S.Ant. 556

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι E. Ion 228

     (lyr.);

    ταύταις ἐ. συντυχίαις Pi.P.1.36

    ;

    ἐπ' εὐπραξίᾳ S.OC 1554

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ παρόντι Th.2.36

    ; ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ λαβεῖν, v. αὐτόφωρος; also ἐ. τῷ δείπνῳ at dinner, X.Cyr.1.3.12, Thphr.Char. 3.2;

    ἐ. τῇ κύλικι Pl.Smp. 214b

    ;

    ἐ. θαλίαις E.Med. 192

     (anap.).
    k. Geom., of the point, etc., at which letters are written, κέντρον ἐφ' ᾧ K Hippocr. ap. Simp.in Ph.64.14; ἡ [γραμμὴ] ἐφ' ᾗ HK the line HK, Arist.Mete. 375b22.
    2. with Verbs of Motion:
    a. where the sense of motion merges in that of support,

    ἐ. χθονὶ βαίνει Il.4.443

    ;

    θεῖναι ἐ. γούνασιν 6.92

    ;

    καταθέσθαι ἐ. γαίῃ 3.114

    ; ἱστὸν ἔστησεν ἐ.

    ψαμάθοις 23.853

    ;

    ἐ. φρεσὶ θῆκε 1.55

    ; δυσφόρους ἐπ' ὄμμασι γνώμας

    βαλεῖν S.Aj.51

    , etc.
    b. in pregnant construction, πέτονται ἐπ' ἄνθεσιν fly on to the flowers and settle there, Il.2.89; ἐκ.. βαῖνον ἐ.

    ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης Od.15.499

    ;

    καθεῖσεν ἐ. Σκαμάνδρῳ Il.5.36

    ; ἦλθε δ'

    ἐ. Κρήτεσσι 4.251

    , cf. 273;

    νῆες εἰρύατ'.. ἐ. θινὶ θαλάσσης 4.248

    .
    c. rarely for εἰς c.acc.,

    νηυσὶν ἔ. γλαφυρῇσιν ἐλαυνέμεν 5.327

    , 11.274.
    d. in hostile sense, upon or against, ἐ. τινι ἔχειν, ἰθύνειν ἵππους, 5.240, 8.110; ἐ. τινι ἱέναι βέλος, ἰθύνεσθαι ὀϊστόν, 1.382, Od.22.8; ἐ. τοι

    Ἀκράγαντι τανύσαις Pi.O.2.91

    ;

    ἐ. Τυδεΐδῃ ἐτιταίνετο.. τόξα Il.5.97

    ;

    ἐφ' Ἕκτορι.. ἀκοντίσσαι 16.358

    ;

    κύνας.. σεύῃ ἐπ' ἀγροτέρῳ συΐ 11.293

    ;

    ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214

    , cf. E.Ph. 1379, etc.: also ἐ. τινι

    τετάχθαι Th.2.70

    , 3.13;

    ὅστις φάρμακα δηλητήρια ποιοῖ ἐ. Τηΐοισιν SIG37.2

     (Teos, v B.C.).
    II. of Time, rarely, and never in good [dialect] Att., exc. in sense of succession (infr. 2), ἐ. νυκτί by night, Il.8.529;

    ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ, αἱ δ' ἐ. νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἐπ' ἤματι τῷδε on this very day, Il.13.234; ἐπ' ἤματι for to-day, 19.229, 10.48, Od.2.284; αἰεὶ ἐπ' ἤματι every day, 14.105;

    ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ Hdt.4.112

    , 5.53, cf. D.S. 34/5.2.1;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ ἐστίν Heraclit.6

    ;

    ἐ. τρίς Act.Ap.10.16

    , PHolm.1.18.
    2. of succession, after, ἕκτῃ ἐ. δέκα on the 16th of the month, Chron. ap. D.18.155, Decr.ib.181 ( δεκάτῃ codd.); τετράδι

    ἐ. δέκα IG12.304.62

    ; πρὸ τῆς ἕκτης ἐ. δέκα ib.22.1361.19; ἐπ' ἐξεργασμένοισι, = Lat. re peracta, Hdt.4.164, etc.; ἐ. τινι ἀγορεύειν, ἀνίστασθαι, E.Or. 898, 902, X.Cyr.2.3.7, etc.;

    ἐ. διεφθαρμένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt.1.170

    , τὰ ἐ. τούτοισι, = Lat. quod superest, Id.9.78, cf. Th.1.65, A.Ag. 255, etc.;

    τοὐπὶ τῷδε πῆμα E.Hipp. 855

     (lyr.), etc.
    3. in the time of (cf. A. 11) only in Arc.,

    ἐπὶ Χαιριάδαι Schwyzer665

     A 21, cf. 666 (Orchom.).
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the occasion or cause, τετεύξεται ἄλγε' ἐπ' αὐτῇ for her, Il.21.585; ἐ. σοὶ μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον for thee, 9.492: freq. with Verbs expressing some mental affection,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit.87

    ; μέγα φρονεῖν ἐ. τινι to be proud at or of a thing, Pl.Prt. 342d, X.HG3.4.11, etc.; χλιδᾶν ἐ . τινι S.El. 360; ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀγανακτεῖν ἐ. τοῖς παροῦσι, X.An.2.6.26, Isoc.4.122;

    ὀνομαστὸς ἐ. τινι γεγονέναι X.Mem.1.2.61

    ; also ἐφ' αἵματι φεύγειν to be tried on a capital charge, D.21.105; πληγὰς λαμβάνειν

    ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.1.3.16

    ;

    ζημιοῦσθαι ἐ. τινι D.24.122

    , etc.: in adverbial phrases [δικάσσαι] ἐπ' ἀρωγῇ with favour, Il.23.574;

    δολίῃ ἐ. τέχνῃ Hes. Th. 540

    ;

    ἐ. μιῇ αἰτίῃ ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἔρδειν Hdt.1.137

    , etc.; ἐ . κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ for malice, Th.1.37; ἐπ' εὐνοία, ἐπ' ἔχθρα, D. 18.273, 21.55; ἐπ' ἀγαθῇ ἐλπίδι with.., X.Mem.2.1.18, cf. Ep.Rom. 4.18; ἐφ' ἑκατέροις in both cases, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Xenoph.34.4; ἐ.

    δάκρυσί τινα καταστένειν E. Tr. 315

     (lyr.); ἐ. τῇ πάσῃ συκοφαντίᾳ καὶ διασεισμῷ Mitteis Chr. 31 vI (ii B.C.), etc.
    2. of an end or purpose,

    υἱὸν ἐ. κτεάτεσσι λιπέσθαι Il.5.154

    , cf. 9.482; ἐ. δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.44;

    ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύρηται Hdt.1.68

    ;

    ἐ. διαφθορῇ Id.4.164

    ;

    ἐ. σῷ καιρῷ S.Ph. 151

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. τῷ κέρδει X.Mem.1.2.56

    ; δῆσαι ἐ. θανάτῳ or τὴν ἐ. θανάτῳ, Hdt.9.37, 3.119, cf.1.109, X.An.1.6.10;

    ἐ. θανάτῳ συλλαβεῖν Isoc.4.154

    ; ἐπ' ἐξαγωγῇ for exportation, Hdt.5.6; χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ with a view to gaining.., Id.1.66;

    ἐ. τούτοις ἐθύσαντο X.An.3.5.18

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ ὑβρίζεσθαι Th.1.38

    , cf.34, etc.;

    τι κακοτεχνεῖν ἐ. αἰσχύνῃ τοῦ ἀνδρός PEleph.1.6

     (iv B.C.).
    3. of the condition upon which a thing is done, ἐ. τούτοισι on these terms, Hdt.1.60, etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖσδε, ὥστε.. Th.3.114

    ; ἐ. τούτῳ, ἐπ' ᾧτε on condition that.., Hdt.3.83, cf. 7.158: in orat. obliq., ἐπ' or ἐφ' ᾧτε folld. by inf., Id.1.22, 7.154, X.HG2.2.20;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν Th.1.126

     (but ἐφ' ᾧ = wherefore, Ep.Rom.5.12); ἐπ' οὐδενί on no condition, on no account, Hdt.3.38; but, for no adequate reason, D. 21.132; ἐπ' ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ, ἐπὶ τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal terms, Hdt.9.7, Th.1.27; ἐ. ῥητοῖς, v. ῥητός; also of a woman's dowry,

    τὴν μητέρα ἐγγυᾶν ἐ. ταῖς ὀγδοήκοντα μναῖς D.28.16

    ; γῆμαί

    τινα ἐ. δέκα ταλάντοις And.4.13

    ;

    τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα ἐ. τῇ τυραννίδι Hdt.1.60

    ; on the principle of..,

    ἐ. τῷ μὴ λυπεῖν ἀλλήλους Th.1.71

    .
    4. of the price for which..,

    ἔργον τελέσαι δώρῳ ἔ. μεγάλῳ Il.10.304

    , cf. 21.445; ἐ. τίνι χρήματι; Hdt.3.38; ἐ. πόσῳ; Pl.Ap. 41a; ἐ .

    ταλάντῳ χρυσίου Ar.Av. 154

    ; ἐπ' ἀργυρίῳ λέγειν, πράττειν, D.19.182, 24.200;

    ἐ. χρήμασι λυμαίνεσθαι Id.19.332

    ;

    ἐ. πολλῷ ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; also of money lent at interest, δανείζεσθαι ἐ. τοῖς μεγάλοις τόκοις ibid.; ἐ. δραχμῇ δανείζειν lend at 12 per cent., Id.27.9; ἐπ' ὀκτὼ ὀβολοῖς τὴν μνᾶν τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου δανείζειν, i.e. at 16 per cent., Id.53.13;

    ἐ. διακοσίαις εἴκοσι πέντε τὰς χιλίας

     for

    225

    per mille, i.e. 22.5 per cent., Syngr. ap. eund.35.10; also of the security on which money is borrowed,

    δανείζειν ἐ. ἀνδραπόδοις Id.27.27

    ; ἐπ' οἴνου

    κεραμίοις τρισχιλίοις Id.35.18

    ;

    ἐ. νηΐ Id.56.3

    ;

    δανείζειν ἐ. τοῖς σώμασιν Arist.Ath.9.1

    , cf. 2.2, D.H.4.9.
    5. of names, φάος καὶ νὺξ ὀνόμασται..

    ἐ. τοῖσί τε καὶ τοῖς Parm.9.2

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔχθρᾳ στάσις κέκληται Pl.R. 470b

    ; so

    ὄνομα κεῖται ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.2.2.12

    ; ὄνομα καλεῖν

    ἐ. τινι Pl.Sph. 218c

    , cf. 244b; πότερον ταῦτα, πέντε ὀνόματα ὄντα, ἐ.

    ἑνὶ πράγματί ἐστι Id.Prt. 349b

     (v. supr. A. 111.2).
    6. of persons in authority, ὅς μ' ἐ. βουσὶν εἷσεν who set me over the kine, Od.20.209, cf. 221;

    ποιμαίνειν ἐπ' ὄεσσι Il.6.25

    ;

    οὖρον κατέλειπον ἐ. κτεάτεσσιν Od.15.89

    ;

    σημαίνειν ἐ. δμῳῇσι 22.427

    ; πέμπειν ἐ. τοσούτῳ

    στρατεύματι Th.6.29

    ;

    ἐ. ταῖς ναυσίν X.HG1.5.11

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. ταῖς μηχαναῖς Id.Cyr.6.3.28

    ; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς καμήλοις ib.33;

    οἱ ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασιν ὄντες D. 9.2

    ;

    ἐ. θυγατρὶ.. γαμεῖν ἄλλην γυναῖκα Hdt.4.154

    .
    7. in possession of, possessing,

    ἐ. τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μένειν Th.4.105

    , cf. 8.86; ζῆν ἐ. παιδίοις, τελευτᾶν ἐ. παιδὶ γνησίῳ, Alciphr.1.3, Philostr.VS2.12.2;

    ἐ. παισὶ διαδόχοις Hdn.4.2.1

    ;

    ἀποθανεῖν ἐ. κληρονόμοις ταῖς θυγατράσι Artem.1.78

    , cf. PMeyer6.22 (ii A.D.);

    ἐ. μόνῳ παιδὶ σαλεύειν Hld. 1.9

    .
    C. WITH Acc.:
    I. of Place, upon or on to a height, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἐ. πύργον ἔβη Il.6.386

    , cf. 12.375; ἐ. τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν

    ὀρέων ἀναβαίνειν Hdt.1.131

    ;

    προελθεῖν ἐ. βῆμα Th.2.34

    ; ἀναβιβαστέον τινά, ἀναβαίνειν ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, Pl.R. 467e, X.An.3.4.35; also ἐξ ἵππων

    ἀποβάντες ἐ. χθόνα Il.3.265

    ; ἐξεκυλίσθη πρηνὴς ἐ. στόμα upon his face, 6.43;

    ἐ. θρόνον.. ἕζετο 8.442

    ; ὤμω.. ἐ. στῆθος συνοχωκότε drawn together upon his breast, 2.218;

    Ὀδυσσῆ' εἷσαν ἐ. σκέπας Od.6.212

    ;

    θέσθαι ἐ. τὰ γόνατα X.An.7.3.23

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν Aeschin.Socr.54

    ; ἐ. κεφαλήν head- foremost, Pl.R. 553b, Luc.Pisc.48 (v. κεφαλή): less freq. than ἐπί with gen. or dat.
    b. Geom., αἱ ἐ. τὰς ἁφὰς ἐπιζευγνύμεναι εὐθεῖαι joining the points of contact, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.8; κάθετος ἐ. perpendicular to (v. κάθετος).
    2. to,

    ἦλθε θοὰς ἐ. νῆας Il.1.12

    , etc.; ἐ. βωμὸν ἄγων ib. 440; ἴθυσαν δ' ἐ.

    τεῖχος 12.443

    ;

    ἐ. τέρμ' ἀφίκετο S.Aj.48

    ;

    ἡ [ὁδὸς] ἐ. Σοῦσα φέρει X. An.3.5.15

    ;

    ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν Πυλῶν ἐ. τὸ Ποσειδώνιον Th.4.118

    ; ἐ.

    τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79

    : c.acc. pers.,

    βῆ δ' ἄρ' ἐπ' Ἀτρεΐδην Il.2.18

    , cf. 10.18,85, 150, etc.: sts. in pregn. constr. with Verbs of Rest,

    ἐπιστῆναι ἐ. τὰς θύρας Pl.Smp. 212d

    ;

    παρεῖναι ἐ. τὸν τάφον Th.2.34

    , cf. X.Cyr.3.3.12.
    b. metaph., ἐ. ἔργα τρέπεσθαι, ἰέναι, Il.3.422, Od.2.127;

    ἰέναι ἐ. τὸν ἔπαινον Th.2.36

    ;

    ἐ. συμφορὴν ἐμπεσεῖν Hdt.7.88

     codd.; also ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν ἀποδιδόναι, ὀφείλειν, pay, owe to the bank, D.33.12, Docum. ap. eund.45.31; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐ. τὴν

    τράπεζαν D.33.10

    ; τὸ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν χρέως ib.24; also εἰσποιηθῆναι ἐ. τὸ ὄνομά τινος to be entered under his name, Id.44.36.
    c. up to, as far as ( μέχρι ἐ. X.An.5.1.[1]),

    παρατείνειν ἐπ' Ἡρακλέας στήλας Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἐ. θάλασσαν καθήκειν Th.2.27

    ,97: metaph., ἐ. πείρατ' ἀέθλων

    ἤλθομεν Od.23.248

    ; ἐ. διηκόσια ἀποδιδόναι yield 200- fold, Hdt. 1.193; in measurements,

    πλέον ἢ ἐ. δύο στάδια X.Cyr.7.5.8

    , An.6.2.2; ὅσον ἐ. εἴκοσι σταδίους ib.6.4.5, cf. 1.7.15: freq. with a neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τόσσον τίς τ' ἐπιλεύσσει ὅσον τ' ἐ. λᾶαν ἵησιν Il.3.12

    ; ὅσσον

    ἔφ' 2.616

    , cf. 15.358; ἐ. τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω,.. ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι I am prudent enough, not to.., Hdt.6.97;

    ἐ. ὅσον δεῖ Th.7.66

    ; ἐ.

    πάντ' ἀφίξομαι S.OT 265

    ;

    ἐ. πᾶν ἐλθεῖν X.An.3.1.18

    ; ἐ. τὸ ἔσχατον

    ἀγῶνος ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; ἐ. μεῖζον χωρεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι, ib. 117, S.Ph. 259;

    ἐ. μέγα χωρεῖν δυνάμεως Th.1.118

    ; ἐ. μακρότερον, ἐ. μακρότατον, Id.4.41, 1.1, Hdt.4.16, 192; ἐ. σμικρόν, ἐ. βραχύ, a little way, a little, S. El. 414, Th.1.118; ἐπ' ἔλαττον, ἐπ' ἐλάχιστον, Pl.Phd. 93b, Th.1.70; ἐπ' ὀλίγον, ἐ. πολλά, Pl.Sph. 254b; ἐ. πλέον still more, Hdt.2.171, 5.51, Th.2.51; rarely with Advs.,

    ἐ. μᾶλλον Hdt.1.94

    , 4.181.
    d. before, into the presence of (cf. A. 1.2e),

    ἦγον δή μιν ἐ. τὰ κοινά Id.3.156

     (but στὰς ἐ. τὸ συνέδριον standing at the door of the council, Id.8.79);

    ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18

    .
    e. in Military phrases (cf. A. 1.2d), ἐπ' ἀσπίδας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐτάξαντο, i.e. twenty-five in file, Th.4.93; dub. in X., as ἐ. πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι many in file, An.4.8.11 codd.;

    ἐπ' ὀλίγον τὸ βάθος γίγνεσθαι Cyr.7.5.2

     codd.; for ἐ. κέρας v. infr.3.
    3. of the quarter or direction towards or in which a thing takes place, ἐ. δεξιά, ἐπ' ἀριστερά, to the right or left, Il.7.238, 12.240, Od.3.171, Hdt.6.33, etc.; ἐ. τὰ ἕτερα or ἐ. θάτερα, Id.5.74, Th.1.87, etc.; ἐ. τὰ μακρότερα , βραχύτερα, on the longer, shorter side, Hdt.1.50; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα νοέων both ways, Id.8.22;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τέλος Pi.O.13.57

    , etc.; ἐ. τάδε Φασήλιδος on this side, Isoc.7.80; ἐ. ἐκεῖνα, v. ἐπέκεινα; ἐφ' ἕν, ἐ. δύο, ἐ. τρία, of space, in one, two, three dimensions, Arist.de An. 404b23, Plot.6.3.13; in Military phrases, ἐ. δόρυ ἀναστρέψαι ,ἐ. ἀσπίδα μεταβαλέσθαι, to the spear or shield side, i.e. to right or left, X.An.4.3.29, Cyr.7.5.6; ἐ. πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, etc., retire on the foot, i.e. facing the enemy, Id.An.5.2.32; so ἐ. κέρας or ἐ. κέρως πλεῖν, etc., sail towards or on the wing, i.e. in column (v.

    κέρας v11

    ): metaph., ἐ. τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι, δεινῶσαι, etc., with exaggeration, Th.1.10, 8.74, etc.;

    ἐ. τὸ πλέον ἀγγέλλεσθαι Id.6.34

    ; ἐ. τὸ φοβερώτερον ib.83; ἐ. τὰ γελοιότερα ἐπαινέσαι so as to provoke laughter, Pl. Smp. 214e; ἐ. τὰ καλλίω, ἐ. τὰ αἰσχίονα, Id.Plt. 293e; ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον καὶ κάλλιον, ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον καὶ τὸ αἴσχιον, Id.R. 381b; ἐ. τὸ ἄμεινον Orac. ap. D.43.66.
    4. in hostile sense, against,

    ἰέναι ἐ. νέας Il. 13.101

    ;

    ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτούς 5.590

    ; στρατεύεσθαι or -εύειν ἐ. τινα, Hdt. 1.71,77, Th.1.26, etc.;

    ἰέναι ἐ. φάτιν S.OT 495

     (lyr.); πλεῖν ἐ. τοὺσ

    Ἀθηναίους Th.2.90

    ;

    πέμπειν στρατηγὸν ἐ. τινας Hdt.1.153

    ; θύεσθαι ἐ. τινα offer sacrifice on going against.., X.An.7.8.21; ἐφ' ὑμᾶς to your prejudice, D.6.33, 10.57.
    5. of extension over a space, πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρὴν ἤλυθον over much water, Il.10.27: ἐπ' εὐρέα νῶτα

    θαλάσσης 2.159

    ;

    ἐ. κύματα 13.27

    ;

    ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον 1.350

    ; πλέων, λεύσσων ἐ. οἴνοπα πόντον, 7.88, 5.771;

    ἐ. πολλὰ δ' ἀλήθην Od. 14.120

    ;

    ἄγοισι.. Ἀνδρομάχαν.. ἐπ' ἄλμυρον πόντον Sapph.Supp. 20a

    . 7: also with Verbs of Rest, ἐπ' ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα over nine acres he lay stretched, Od.11.577; τόσσον ἔπ' over so much, 5.251, cf. 13.114; διώκοντες ἐ. πολύ over a large space, Th.1.50, cf. 62, etc.; ἐ. πλεῖστον ib.4;

    ὡς ἐ. πλεῖστον 2.34

    , etc.; freq. to be rendered on,

    δράκων ἐ. νῶτα δαφοινός Il.2.308

    ; ἵππους.. ἐ. νῶτον ἐΐσας ib. 765;

    ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει 17.447

    ; ἐ. γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω [γένη] Hes.Op.11;

    ἀοιδοὶ ἔασιν ἐ. χθόνα Th.95

    ;

    ἐ. γᾶν μέλαιναν ἔμμεναι κάλλιστον Sapph. Supp.5.2

    ; also, among,

    κλέος πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους Il.10.213

    , cf. 24.202, 535;

    δασσάμενοι [κτήματ'] ἐφ' ἡμέας Od.16.385

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 322d.
    II. of Time, for or during a certain time,

    ἐ. χρόνον Il.2.299

    , Od.14.193:

    πολλὸν ἐ. χρόνον 12.407

    ;

    παυρίδιον.. ἐ. χρόνον Hes. Op. 133

    ;

    ἐ. δηρόν Il.9.415

    ;

    ἐ. πολὺν χρόνον Pl.Phd. 84c

    , etc.; ἐπ'

    ὀλίγον χρόνον Lycurg.7

    ; ἐ. χρόνον τινά, ἐ. τινα χρόνον, Pl.Prt. 344b, Grg. 524d;

    γῆν ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐ. δέκα ἔτη Th.3.68

    ; ἐ. διετές Lexap.D. 46.20;

    ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας X.An.6.6.36

    ; τὸ ἐφ' ἡμέραν ἀρκέσον enough for the day, Id.Cyr.6.2.34, cf. D.50.23, Hdt.1.32; ἐ. πολύ for a long time, Th.1.6, etc.
    2. up to, until a certain time, εὗδον παννύχιος

    καὶ ἐπ' ἠῶ καὶ μέσον ἦμαρ Od.7.288

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐ. γῆρας ἵκετ' 8.226

    .
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the object or purpose for which one goes, ἀγγελίην ἔπι Τυδῆ στεῖλαν sent him for (i.e. to bring) tidings of.., Il.4.384 (dub.); ἐ. βοῦν ἴτω let him go for an ox, Od.3.421;

    ἐ. τεύχεα δ' ἐσσεύοντο Il.2.808

    ;

    ἐλθεῖν πρός τινα ἐπ' ἀργύριον X.Cyr.1.6.12

    ; πέμπειν εἴς τινα ἐ. στράτευμα ib.4.5.31; ἴτω τις ἐφ' ὕδωρ ib.5.3.49; ἥκειν ἐ. τοὺς τόκους for (i.e. to demand) the interest, D.50.61: less freq. c. acc. pers.,

    ἐπ' Ὀδυσσῆα ἤϊε Od.5.149

    , cf. S.OT 555;

    κατῆλθον ἐ. ποιητήν Ar.Ra. 1418

    ;

    κατέρχονται ἐ. τὸν Ἀγόρατον Lys. 13.23

    : with acc. of a Noun of Action, ἐξιέναι ἐ. θήραν go out hunting, X.Cyr.1.2.9; ἔπλεον οὐχ ὡς ἐ. ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for -μαχίᾳ) Th.2.83;

    ἐ. μάχην ἰέναι X.An.1.4.12

    ; ἔρχεσθαι, ἵζειν ἐ. δεῖπνον, Il.2.381, Od.24.394;

    ἐ. δόρπον ἀνέστη 12.439

    ;

    κληθεὶς ἐ. δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174e

    , etc.;

    καλεῖν ἐ. ξείνια Hdt.2.107

    ,5.18; ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν to see the sight, Ev.Luc.23.48, cf. PTeb.33.6 (ii B.C.): freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., ἐ. τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν for this purpose, X.An.2.5.22, cf. Th.5.87; ἐπ' αὐτὸ

    τοῦτο Pl.Grg. 447b

    , etc.; ἐ. τί; to what end? Ar.Nu. 256;

    ἐφ' ὅ τι Id.Lys.22

    , 481; ἐφ' ἃ ἤλθομεν for which purpose, Th.7.15, etc.; ἐπὶ ἴσα for like ends, Pi.N.7.5 (but ἐ. ἶσα μάχη τέτατο, = ἴσως, Il.12.436); ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον to a better result, X.An.7.8.4; ἀναστῆσαί τινα ἐ. χριστὸν Θεοῦ set up as God's anointed, LXX 2 Ki.23.1: after an Adj., ἄριστοι πᾶσαν

    ἐπ' ἰθύν Il.6.79

    , cf. Od.4.434;

    ἄπορος ἐ. φρόνιμα S.OT 691

     (lyr.); χρήσιμος

    ἐ... οὐδέν D.25.31

    : after a Noun,

    ὁδὸς ἐ. τι X.Cyr.1.6.21

    ; ὄργανα ἐ. τι ib.6.2.34.
    2. so far as regards,

    τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S.Ant. 889

    ;

    ὅσον γε τοὐπ' ἐμέ E.Or. 1345

    ; τοὐπί σε, τὸ ἐ. σέ, Id.Hec. 514, X.Cyr.1.4.12;

    τὸ ἐ. σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28

    ; ὡς ἐ. τὸ πολύ for the most part, Arist.Top. 100b29, etc.;

    ἐ. πᾶν Th.2.51

    ; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν

    ξυνετὸν ἐ. πᾶν ἀργόν Id.3.82

    ;

    κρείσσων ἐπ' ἀρετήν Democr.181

    ; ἐ.

    μέγα Call.Dian.55

    .
    3. of persons set over others, ἐ. τοὺς πεζοὺς

    καθιστάναι ἄρχοντα X.Cyr.4.5.58

    , cf. HG3.4.20; στρατηγὸς ἐ. τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἐ. τὴν χώραν, Arist.Ath.61.1, IG22.682.24;

    ἐ. τὸν Πειραιέα Arist.Ath.

    l.c.;

    ἐ. Ῥαμνοῦντα IG2.1206b

     (cf. A. 111.1); οἱ θεσμοθέται

    οἱ ἐ. τοὺς νόμους κληρούμενοι D.20.90

    .
    4. according to, by, ἐ. στάθμην by the rule, Od.5.245, 21.44, etc.
    D. POSITION:— ἐπί may suffer anastrophe ([etym.] ἔπι) and follow its case, as in Il.1.162; it may like wise follow its Verb,

    ἤλυθ' ἔπι ψυχή Od.24.20

    , cf. Il.9.539.
    II. in Poets it is sts. put with the second of two Nouns, though in sense it also governs the first, ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐ.

    γῆς Od.12.27

    , cf. S.OT 761, Ant. 367 (lyr.).
    E. ABS., used adverbially, without anastrophe, καὶ ἐ. σκέπας

    ἦν ἀνέμοιο Od.5.443

    ; κτεῖνον δ' ἐ. μηλοβοτῆρας as well, Il.18.529; esp. ἐ. δέ.. and besides.., Hdt.7.65,75, etc.;

    πολιαί τ' ἐ. ματέρες S. OT 182

     (lyr.).
    II. ἔπι, for ἔπεστι, there is, Il.1.515, 3.45, Od.16.315; οὐ γὰρ ἔπ' ἀνήρ.. there is no man.., 2.58; σοὶ δ' ἔ. μὲν μορφὴ

    ἐπέων 11.367

    ;

    ἔ. δέ μοι γέρας A.Eu. 393

     codd. (lyr.).
    F. PROSODY: in ἐπιόψομαι, ι is not elided before a vowel; also in some words where σ or ϝ has been lost, as ἐπιάλμενος, ἐπιείκελος, ἐπιεικής, ἐπιέξομαι (v.

    ἐπέχω v11

    ). [dialect] Dor. ἐπιεργάζομαι (v. ἐπιεργάζομαι).
    G. IN COMPOSITION:
    I. of Place, denoting,
    1. Support or Rest upon, ἔπειμι (A), ἐπίκειμαι, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπαυχένιος, ἐπιβώμιος, etc.
    2. Motion,
    a. upon or over, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιτρέχω.
    b. to or towards, ἐπέρχομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, ἐπαρίστερος, ἐπιδέξιος.
    c. against,

    ἐπαΐσσω, ἐπιπλέω 11

    , ἐπιστρατεύω, ἐπιβουλεύω.
    e. over a place, as in ἐπαιωρέομαι, ἐπαρτάω.
    f. over or beyond boundaries, as in ἐπινέμομαι.
    g. implying reciprocity, as in ἐπιγαμία.
    3. Extension over a surface, as in ἐπαλείφω, ἐπανθίζω,

    ἐπιπέτομαι, ἐπιπλέω 1

    , ἐπάργυρος, ἐπίχρυσος.
    4. Accumulation of one thing over or besides another, as in ἐπαγείρω, ἐπιμανθάνω, ἐπαυξάνω, ἐπιβάλλω, ἐπίκτητος.
    5. Accompaniment, to, with, as in ἐπᾴδω, ἐπαυλέω, ἐπαγρυπνέω: hence of Addition, ἐπίτριτος one and 1/3 more, 1 +1/3; so ἐπιτέταρτος, ἐπίπεμπτος, ἐπόγδοος, etc.
    6. with Adjs., somewhat, slightly, as in ἐπίξανθος, ἐπίπικρος.
    II. of Time and Sequence, after, as in ἐπιβιόω, ἐπιβλαστάνω, ἐπιγίγνομαι,

    ἐπακόλουθος, ἐπίγονος, ἐπιστάτης 1.2

    .
    III. in causal senses:
    1. Superiority felt over or at, as in ἐπιχαίρω, ἐπιγελάω, ἐπαισχύνομαι.
    2. Authority over, as in ἐπικρατέω, ἔπαρχος, ἐπιβουκόλος, ἐπιποιμήν.
    3. Motive for, as in ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιθάνατος.
    4. to give force or intensity to the Verb, as in ἐπαινέω, ἐπιμέμφομαι, ἐπικείρω, ἐπικλάω.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπί

  • 4 ὑπό

    ὑπό [pron. full] [ῠ], Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: [dialect] Aeol. [full] ὐπά Alc.39; [dialect] Boeot. [full] ὑπά
    A

    Ἀρχ.Δελτ. 14

     Pl. ii 19 (Thespiae, iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. ηυπύ only in IG 14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.); Arc. [full] ὁπύ Schwyzer 664.15,21 (Orchom.Arc., iv B.C.); in [dialect] Ep. [full] ὑπαί (also B. 12.139): this is found in Hom. only six times as a well-attested reading (

    ὑ. πόδα Il.2.824

    ,

    ὑ. δέ 3.217

    , 11.417, 12.149,

    ὑ. δείους 10.376

    , 15.4); elsewh. (before λ ν ρ ϝ ) it is weakly attested as v. l. for ὑπὸ ([etym.] ?ὑπόX ¯ ), e.g. ποσσὶ δ' ὑπὸ (v.l. ὑπαὶ)

    λιπαροῖσι Il.2.44

    , al.; but ὑπαὶ νεφέων is given by most codd. in Il.15.625, 16.375 (v. Allen ed. maj.), and

    ὑπαὶ νεφέεσσι Anon.

     ap. Plu.2.38e; also in compds.,

    ὑπαιδείδοικα h.Merc. 165

    , ὑπαιφοινίσσω (q. v.); it is not freq. in Trag. Poets, A.Ag. 892, 944, 1164 (lyr.), Eu. 417, S.El. 711, 1418 (lyr.), Inach. in PTeb. 692 ii5 (lyr.), E.El. 1188 (lyr.), Ar. Ach. 970 (paratrag.). (With ὑπό ([etym.] ὕπο) cf. Skt. úpa 'towards, near to, etc.', Goth. uf 'under'.)
    A WITH GENITIVE,
    I of Place, with Verbs of motion, from under, αὖτις ἀναστήσονται ὑ. ζόφου they will rise again from under the gloom, Il.21.56;

    ὑ. χθονὸς ἧκε φόωσδε Hes.Th. 669

    ;

    ῥέει κρήνη ὑ. σπείους Od.9.141

    , cf. Pl.Phdr. 230b;

    ὄσσε δεινὸν ὑ. βλεφάρων ἐξεφάανθεν Il.19.17

    ; ἐσιδόντες ὑπαὶ χειμῶνος αἴγλαν from under the storm-cloud, B.12.139; esp. of rescuing from under another's power, after the Verbs ἐρύεσθαι, ἁρπάζειν, ῥύεσθαι, ἐρύειν, Il.9.248, 13.198, 17.224, 235;

    ἤγαγεν ὑμέτερόνδ' ἀνδροκτασίης ὕ. λυγρῆς

     from the consequences of,

    23.86

    ; also ἵππους μὲν λῦσαν ὑ. ζυγοῦ from under the yoke, 8.543, Od.4.39; ὑπ' ἀρνειοῦ λυόμην I loosed myself from under the ram, 9.463; σπλάγχνων ὕπο ματέρος μόλεν, i.e. was born, Pi.N.1.35, cf. O.6.43; rarely in Trag.,

    ὑ. πτερῶν σπάσας E.Andr. 441

    ;

    περᾷ γὰρ ἥδ' ὑ. σκηνῆς πόδα Id.Hec.53

    ; once in Hdt.,

    τὰς δέ οἱ ἵππους ὑ. τοῦ ἅρματος νεμομένας ἀφανισθῆναι 4.8

    ;

    αἴ τις ὑ. τῶν νομίων τῶν ἐπιϝοικων ἀνχωρέῃ SIG47.27

     (Locris, v B.C.); cf. ὑπέκ.
    2 of the object under which a thing is or is placed, under, beneath, with collat. sense of motion, as μοχλὸν ὑ. σποδοῦ ἤλασα πολλῆς thrust it in under the embers, Od. 9.375;

    ὑ. στέρνοιο τυχήσας Il.4.106

    ;

    τοὺς μὲν ὑ. χθονὸς εὐρυοδείης πέμψαν Hes.Th. 717

    : also without the sense of motion,

    ὑπ' ἀνθερεῶνος ὀχεὺς τέτατο Il.3.372

    ;

    βάθιστον ὑ. χθονός ἐστι βέρεθρον 8.14

    ;

    ἐτέθαπτο ὑ. χθονός Od.11.52

    ;

    κεκευθὼς πολεμίας ὑ. χθονός A.Th. 588

    ;

    ὑπ' ἀγκῶνος βέλη Pi.O.2.83

    ;

    νέρθεν ὑπ' ἐγκεφάλοιο Il.16.347

    ;

    τὰ ὑ. γῆς δικαιωτήρια Pl.Phdr. 249a

    ;

    δεξιὰν ὑφ' εἵματος κρύπτειν E.Hec. 342

    ; φέρειν ζώνης ὕπο ib. 762: Thom.Mag.p.375 R. says that ὑ. = under takes gen. in [dialect] Att., acc. in 'Hellenic' Greek; κατακρύψας ὑ. κόπρου, which is v.l. in Od.9.329 for ὑ. κόπρῳ, is called by Eust.1631.36 Ἀττικώτερον, ὁποῖον καὶ τὸ φέρειν τι ὑ. κόλπου ἢ ὑ. μάλης (v. κόλπος, μάλη); but in [dialect] Att. Prose, Hdt., and the Koine ὑ. c. gen. in signfs. 1.1, 2 is almost limited to these and a few other phrases, esp. ὑ. γῆς; it is not found at all in Th., LXX, Ptolemaic papyri, and NT; X. has ὑ. ἁμάξης ( = from under) An.6.4.22,25; the Orators have only ὑ. μάλης, Lys.Fr.54, D.29.12; ὑ. γῆς is found in Pl.Ap. 18b, Mx. 246d, R. 414d, al., Arist.Mete. 352b6, al., Hipparch.2.2.45, Plb.18.18.10 ([etym.] ὑ. τῆς γῆς), 21.28.3,10.
    II of Cause or Agency, freq. with pass. Verbs, and with intr. Verbs in pass. sense,

    μή πως τάχ' ὑπ' αὐτοῦ δουρὶ δαμήῃς Il.3.436

    , cf. 4.479;

    ἡνιόχοιο ἐν κονίῃσι πεσόντος ὑφ' Ἕκτορος 17.428

    ; εὖτ' ἂν πολλοὶ ὑφ' Ἕκτορος θνῂσκοντες πίπτωσι 1.242;

    τὸν.. τοκέα ὑ. τοῦ.. παιδὸς ἀποθνῄσκειν Hdt.1.137

    ;

    οἵαις ὑπ' αὐτοῦ πημοναῖσι κάμπτομαι A.Pr. 308

    , cf. Th.7, al.;

    πέλεκυς.. ὅς τ' εἶσιν διὰ δουρὸς ὑπ' ἀνέρος Il.3.61

    ;

    ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν.. φοβέοντο.. ἀπὸ νηῶν 16.303

    ;

    πάσχειν δὲ κακῶς ἐχθρὸν ὑπ' ἐχθρῶν A.Pr. 1042

     (anap.);

    ὑ. τοῦ Μήδου δεινότερα τούτων πάσχοντες Th.1.77

    ;

    ἐκπεσόντες ὑ. τοῦ πλήθους Id.4.66

    ;

    ἀναστάτων Καμαριναίων γενομένων ὑ. Συρακοσίων Id.6.5

    ;

    ὑφ' ὑμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ μὴ ὑ. τῶν πολεμίων τοῦτο παθεῖν Id.4.64

    ; κλύοντές ἐσμεν αἰσχίστους λόγους.. τοῦδ' ὑπ' ἀνδρὸς ἀρτίως we have been called shameful names by.., S.Aj. 1321; κακῶς ὑ. τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκούειν to be ill spoken of by.., Isoc.4.77, cf. Pl.Hp.Ma. 304e, X.An. 7.7.23; of a subordinate agent, ὑ. κήρυκος προαγορεύειν, ἀπειπεῖν κηρύκων ὕπο, Hdt.9.98, E.Alc. 737, cf. Th.6.32;

    ἐμῶν ὑπ' ἀγγέλων.. πορεύεται S.Tr. 391

    ;

    ὑ. ἀγγέλων πέμπων Pl.Phlb. 66a

    : sts. with a verbal Subst., τὸ ὑ. νόμου ἐπίταγμα (i. e. ἐπιταττόμενον) Id.R. 359a;

    ἐκφορὰ φίλων ὕπο A.Th. 1029

    ;

    ἡ ὑπ' ἀρετῆς Ἡρακλέους παίδευσις X. Mem.2.1.34

    ;

    ἡ ὑ. πάντων τιμή Id.Cyr.3.3.2

    ;

    Ἥρας δεσμοὶ ὑ. ὑέος Pl. R. 378d

    ; so ἄτρωτον ἦν ὑ. στύγους ( = οὐ τετρωμένον) prob. in A.Ch. 532.
    2 also in pregnant phrases, not only of the immediate act of the agent, but also of its further result, ὅθ' ὑ. λιγέων ἀνέμων σπέρχωσιν ἄελλαι hasten driven on by them, Il.13.334; ὑφ' Ἕκτορος.. φεύγοντες fleeing before him, 18.149,

    χάσσονται ὑπ' ἔγχεος 13.153

    , cf. 7.64, 11.119, 424, Od.5.320, 7.263, al.;

    πράγματα εἶχον ὑ. λῃστῶν X.HG5.1.5

    ; ἔπαινον, αἰτίαν ἔχειν ὑ. τινῶν, Hdt.9.78, A.Eu.99;

    οὐκέτι ἀποχωρεῖν οἷόν τ' ἦν ὑ. τῶν ἱππέων Th.7.78

    , cf. Ar.V. 1084.
    3 freq. of things as well as persons,

    ὡς διάκειμαι ὑ. τῆς νόσου Th.7.77

    ;

    κεῖμαι νούσου ὕ. στυγερᾶς IG42(1).125.8

     (Epid., iii B.C.);

    χαλεπῶς ἔχειν ὑ. τραυμάτων Pl.Tht. 142b

    ;

    ὑ. δόρατος πλαγείς IG42(1).122.64

     (Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. ἔχιος φῦμα ib.123.4 (ibid., iv B.C.); ἰάθη ὑ. ὄφιος ib.121.113 (ibid., iv B.C.);

    κατεσκεύασαν τὰς πύλας κλείεσθαι ὑ. σφύρας τε μεγάλης καὶ κτύπου παμμεγέθους γιγνομένου Aen.Tact.20.4

    : of the agency of feelings, passions, etc.,

    ἀνόρουσ' ὑ. χάρματος h.Cer. 371

    ; ἐνδακρύειν, ἀνολολύξαι χαρᾶς ὕπο, A.Ag. 541, 587;

    μαίνεται.. ὑφ' ἡδονῆς S.El. 1153

    ;

    χλωρὸς ὑπαὶ δείους Il.10.376

    ;

    ὑ. δέους ἔρρηξε φωνήν Hdt.1.85

    , cf. Th.6.33;

    οὐ δυνατὸν τὸν δῆμον ἐσόμενον ὑ. τῶν κακῶν καρτερεῖν Id.4.66

    ;

    ὑ. κακοῦ ἀγρυπνίῃσι εἴχετο Hdt.3.129

    ;

    ὑπ' ἄλγους A.Eu. 183

    ;

    ὑπ' ὀργῆς Ar.V. 1083

    ;

    ὑ. λύπης S.OT 1073

    : hence ὑπό is used even with active Verbs, where a passive word may be supplied, e.g. ὑ. ἀρετῆς καὶ προθυμίης συνεπλήρουν τὰς νέας from courage, i. e. impelled by courage, Hdt.8.1;

    ὤρυσσον ὑ. μαστίγων Id.7.22

    , cf. 56; οὐδὲ σέ γε δόλος ἔσχ' ὑ. χειρὸς ἐμᾶς by my agency, S.Ph. 1118 (lyr.); αἰ μήτις αὐτὸς δοίη, μὴ ὑπ' ἀνάγκας not under compulsion, GDI5128.5 ([place name] Vaxos).
    4 ὑπό freq. serves to denote the attendant or accompanying circumstances,

    νέφος ἐρχόμενον κατὰ πόντον ὑ. Ζεφύροιο ἰωῆς Il.4.276

    , cf. 16.591, etc.: sts. with part. added, ἀμφὶ δὲ νῆες σμερδαλέον κονάβησαν ἀϋσάντων ὑπ' Ἀχαιῶν at their shouting, i.e. when they shouted, 2.334, 16.277;

    ἴαχε σάλπιγξ ἄστυ περιπλομένων δηΐων ὕ. 18.220

    .
    5 of accompanying music, to give the time,

    κώμαζον ὑπ' αὐλοῦ Hes.Sc. 281

    , cf. 278;

    ᾄδων ὑπ' αὐλητῆρος Archil.123

    , cf. Thgn.825, Charon Fr.9;

    πίνειν ὑ. σάλπιγγος Ar.Ach. 1001

    : generally, of anything attendant, δαΐδων ὕ. λαμπομενάων ἠγίνεον by torchlight, Il.18.492, cf. E.Hel. 639 (lyr.), Ion 1474 (lyr.);

    καταθάψομεν.. ὑ. κλαυθμῶν A.Ag. 1554

     (anap.);

    ὑπ' εὐκλείας θανεῖν E.Hipp. 1299

    ;

    εἴσειμ' ὑπαὶ πτερύγων κιχλᾶν καὶ κοψίχων Ar.Ach. 970

    ; ὑπ' εὐφήμου βοῆς θῦσαι offer a sacrifice accompanied by it, S.El. 630; ὑ. φανοῦ πορεύεσθαι by lantern-light, X.Lac.5.7; ὑ. πομπῆς ἐξάγειν τινά in or with solemn procession, Hdt.2.45, cf. Ar.Th. 1030; ὑ. βίης βήξας coughing with violence, violently, Hdt.6.107; ἐτόξευον ὑ. μαστίγων, i.e. they shot and lashed, X.An.3.4.25: v. infr. B. 11.4, C. IV. 1.
    6 ὑ. Ἑλλανοδικᾶν, = ἐπί c. gen., SIG171 (Olympia, iv B.C.).
    7 Math., ἡ ὑ. ΘΔΗ the angle ΘΔΗ ( = ἡ ὑ. τῶν ΘΔ, ΔΗ περιεχομένη γωνία), Procl. Hyp.2.26; but also τὸ ὑ. τῶν ΑΓ, ΓΒ the rectangle contained by ΑΓ, ΓΒ, = ΑΓ χ ΓΒ, Euc.2.4.
    8 ναῦλον ὄνων γ εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὑ. οἴνου laden with wine, Pap. in Hermes 28.163 (ii A.D.), cf. ib.479, and infr. C. IV. 2.
    B WITH DATIVE (esp. in Poets, never in LXX (Jb.12.5 is dub. l.) or NT, not common in Arist., Ptolemaic papyri, or Plb.), of Position under,

    ὑ. ποσσί Il.2.784

    , al.; ὑ. πλατανίστῳ ib. 307, cf. 18.558; ὑ. Τμώλῳ at its foot, 2.866, cf. Od.1.186;

    Βερύσιοι ὑ. τῇ Ἴδῃ IG12.191.11

    , cf. 373.118, al.;

    ὑ. τῇ ἀκροπόλι Hdt.6.105

    ; τῶν θανόντων ὑπ' Ἰλίῳ under its walls, E.Hec. 764, cf. A.Ag. 860;

    πέτρῃ ὕ. γλαφυρῇ εὗδον, Βορέω ὑπ' ἰωγῇ Od.14.533

    ;

    ὑ. τοῖς ὄρεσιν ἔχειν τὰς πηγάς Arist.Mete. 350b27

    ;

    ὑ. πέτρᾳ παῖς IG42(1).122.19

     (Epid., iv B.C.); ὑ. τῷ ναῷ ἀστραγαλίζοντος αὐτοῦ ib.121.25 (ibid., iv B.C.); ηυπὺ τῇ κλίνῃ τούτῃ ληνὸς (or Λῆνος) ηύπυ ib.14.871 (Cumae, v B.C.);

    στρουθοὶ ὑ. τῇ τραπέζῃ Michel 832.33

     (Samos, iv B.C.);

    ὑ. τῇ μασχάλῃ Hp.Art.11

    ;

    χέλυν δ' ὑ. μασχάλῃ εἶχεν h.Merc. 242

    ;

    ὑ. ταῖς μασχάλαις Arist.PA 688b5

    ,14; ὁ ὑ. τῇ γῇ ἀήρ under the earth, Id.Cael. 295a28; ἐὰν ὑ. σοὶ κατακλινῇ lies next below you, Pl.Smp. 222e; ὑφ' ἅρμασι under, i.e. yoked to, the chariot, Il.8.402, 18.244;

    εἶχε μάχαιραν ὑφ' αὑτῷ παρεσκευασμένος Plb.8.20.6

     codd., cf. POxy. 1800 Fr.2.36 (Vit.Aesop.);

    ὑ. τοῖς χιτωνίσκοις περιζώματα φοροῦσιν Plb.12.26a

    .4, cf. 13.7.9; τά τε θηρία καὶ τὰς ὑπ' αὐτοῖς σχεδίας under them, on which they stood, Id.3.46.8;

    τῆς γῆς τῆς ὑ. τῷ κόσμῳ κειμένης Timae.

     ap. eund.12.25.7;

    οἱ ὑ. τῇ ἄρκτῳ, τῇ μεσημβρία, οἰκοῦντες Adam.2.31

    , cf. Arist.Pr. 940a37, Phgn. 806b16;

    ὑ. τῷ μετώπῳ ὀφρύες Id.HA 491b14

    ;

    ὑ. τῷ γενείῳ Plb.34.10.9

    ;

    τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ὕδασι καὶ ὑμέσι καὶ ὑέλοις Hero

     *Deff.135.12;

    ὑ. τῷ δέρματι Gal. 18(2).102

    .
    2 with Verbs of motion, where rest or position follows, εἷσαν ὑ. φηγῷ set [him] down under it, Il.5.693;

    ἔζευξαν ὑφ' ἅρμασιν.. ἵππους Od.3.478

    , cf. Il.24.782;

    ὑ. δ' ἄξοσι.. ἔπιπτον 16.378

    , cf. X.Cyr.7.1.37;

    δέμνι' ὑπ' αἰθούσῃ θέμεναι Il.24.644

    .
    3 in such phrases as ὑ. χερσί τινος ἁλῶναι, δαμῆναι, 2.374, 860, al.;

    ἐμῇς ὑ. χερσὶ δάμασσον 3.352

    ;

    ὑ. δουρὶ δαμῆναι 5.653

    , etc.;

    ἔκπεσον ἵππων Ἀτρεΐδεω ὑ. χερσί 11.180

    ;

    ὤλετο.. ὑ. γαμφηλῇσι λέοντος 16.489

    ;

    πέπληγμαι δ' ὑπαὶ δάκει φοινίῳ A.Ag. 1164

     (lyr.);

    ἐν κονίῃσι πέσοιεν ὑπ' ἀνδράσι Il.6.453

    ;

    ὑ. τινὶ κτείνεσθαι 16.490

    .
    4 behind,

    ὑ. φάλαγγι Ascl.Tact.6.1

    ; under the cover or protection of,

    ὑ. τούτῳ τῷ φράγματι τοὺς ὑπορύσσοντας εἶναι Aen.Tact.37.9

    ;

    ὑ. ταῖς αὑτῶν ἀσφαλείαις Plb. 1.57.8

    , 4.12.10, 16.6.1.
    II of the person under whose hand, power, or influence, or the thing by or through which a thing is done, ὑπ' Ἀργείοισι φέβοντο fled before them, Il.11.121; freq. in Hom. with intr. or pass. Verbs,

    ἐφόβηθεν ὑφ' Ἕκτορι Il.15.637

    ;

    ὁρμηθέντες ὑ. πληγῇσιν ἱμάσθλης Od.13.82

    ;

    βῆ.. θεῶν ὑ. πομπῇ Il.6.171

    ;

    ὦρτο δὲ κῦμα πνοιῇ ὕπο 23.215

    ;

    ὑ. λαίλαπι βέβριθε χθών 16.384

    ; τεκεῖν, τεκέσθαι ὑ. τινί, 2.714, 728, 742;

    ἀτῆθαι ὑ. τῷ μεμφομένῳ GDI4994.8

     ([place name] Crete);

    ὁ χρησμὸς ὁ γεγονὼς ὑ. τοῖ Ἀπόλλωνι Inscr.Magn.38.5

    , cf. 12,31,52.
    2 expressing subjection or dependence, ὑ. τινί under one's power,

    δέδμητο δὲ λαὸς ὑπ' αὐτῷ Od.3.305

    , cf. Il.9.156;

    ὑπ' ἀνδράσιν οἶκον ἔχουσιν Od. 7.68

    ; εἶναι ὑ. τισί to be subordinate, subject to them, Th.1.32; ὑ. Χείρωνι τεθραμμένος under the eye of.., Pl.R. 391c; ἔχειν ὑφ' ἑαυτῷ have under one, at one's command, X.Cyr.2.1.26;

    τὰ θηρία τὰ ὑ. τοῖς ἀνθρώποις Pl.R. 563c

    ;

    ὑ. τινὶ στρατεύσασθαι Plu.Cic.44

    : in pregnant sense,

    ἵνα.. πάντα ὑ. Πέρσῃσι γένηται Hdt.7.11

    , cf. Th.7.64;

    ὑπ' ἑωυτῷ ποιήσασθαι Hdt.7.157

    ;

    κινδυνεύσαιμ' ἂν ὑ. τῇ δυσχερεστάτῃ γενέσθαι τύχῃ Lys.24.6

    ;

    ὑ. τῷ Μακεδόνι ταττομένων Plb.18.11.4

    ;

    τοὺς τραφέντας ὑ. τούτοις Id.6.7.2

    .
    3 of the subordination of things coming under a class,

    αἱ ὑ. ταῖς τέχναις ἐργασίαι Pl.Smp. 205c

    ;

    τὸ ὑ. ταῖς γεωμετρίαις Id.R. 511b

    ;

    ὄργανα.. τὰ ὑ. τῇ μουσικῇ Id.Hp.Ma. 295d

    .
    4 as in A. 11.5, ὑπ' αὐλητῆρι πρόσθ' ἔκιον advanced to the music of the flute-player, Hes.Sc. 283; ὑπ' αὐλῷ, ὑ. κήρυκι καὶ θεολόγῳ, Luc.DDeor.2.2, Alex.19;

    ὑ. μάστιξι διορύττειν τὸν Ἄθω Plu.2.470e

    : generally, of attendant circumstances,

    ἐξ ἁλὸς εἶσι.. πνοιῇ ὕπο Ζεφύροιο Od.4.402

    ; ὑ. ῥάβδοις καὶ πελέκεσι κατιών escorted by the lictors, Plu.Publ.10; ὑ. σκότῳ, νυκτί, A.Ag. 1030 (lyr.), A.R. 1.1022, etc.;

    λάμπει δ' ὑ. μαρμαρυγαῖς ὁ χρυσός B.3.17

    ;

    αἰθομένα δᾲς ὑ. ξανθαἵσι πεύκαις Pi.Fr.79

    ;

    ὑ. φωτὶ πολλῷ προσῄει Plu.Galb.14

    ;

    ὑ. λαμπάσιν ἡμμέναις Hld.10.41

    ; ὑ. πολλῷ στρατῷ escorted by a great host, Nic.Dam.10J.;

    ὑ. δικαιοσύνῃ διαγαγεῖν τὸν βίον Pl.Ep. 335d

    .— ὑπό has no sense c. dat. which it has not also c. gen.; but all its senses c. gen. do not belong to the dat.:—later ὑπό c. dat. is found as a mere periphr. of the dat.,

    στέφος.. αὐτὸς ὑφ' ἡμετέραις πλεξάμενος παλάμαις AP5.73

     (Rufin.), cf. 85 (Claudian.);

    λέων ὑπ' ἄκοντι τετυμμένος A.R.2.26

    , cf. Man.2.131.
    C WITH ACCUSATIVE, of Place; to express motion towards and under an object, ὑ. σπέος ἤλασε μῆλα drove them under, i.e. into, the cave, Il.4.279;

    ὑ. ζυγὸν ἤγαγεν Od.3.383

    ; σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ' ὑ. γαῖαν, i.e. shall die, Il.18.333;

    νέεσθαι ὑ. ζόφον 23.51

    , cf. Od.3.335; κατακρύπτειν τινὰ ὑ. τὴν αὐτὴν θύρην under shelter of it, i.e. behind it, Hdt.1.12;

    πάϊς ὣς ὑ. μητέρα δύσκεν εἰς Αἴαντα Il.8.271

    ;

    ὅκως ἔωσι ὑ. τὸν πεζὸν στρατὸν τὸν σφέτερον Hdt.9.96

    ;

    ὑ. τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ὁπλιτῶν τὸν πρῶτον λόχον τῶν ψιλῶν τετάχθαι Ael.Tact.15.2

    ; of coming close up under a lofty citadel, ἤλθεθ' ὑ. Τροίην up to T., Od.4.146;

    ὅτ' ἔμελλεν ὑ. πτόλιν αἰπύ τε τεῖχος ἵξεσθαι Il.11.181

    ;

    παυρότερον λαὸν ἀγαγόνθ' ὑ. τεῖχος ἄρειον 4.407

    ;

    ὑ. τὰ τείχη φεύγειν Plb.1.74.11

    ;

    ὑ. τὰς ἴλας φεύγειν Id.3.65.7

    , cf. 3.105.6, 11.21.5, al.;

    ὑ. ταὐτὸ στέγος εἰσελθεῖν GDI3536

     B 3 ([place name] Cnidus);

    πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν ἔλθῃ.. ὑ. τὴν ῥάβδον LXXLe.27.32

    , cf. De.4.11, al.; so ὑ. δικαστήριον ὑπαχθείς, ἀγαγόντες, Hdt.6.72, 104 (cf. ὑπάγειν ὑ. τοὺς ἐφόρους ib.82) prob. refers to the elevated seats of the judges in court, cf. ὑπάγω A ΙΙ.
    2 of Position or Extension under an object, without sense of motion,

    Ἀρκαδίην ὑ. Κυλλήνης ὄρος Il.2.603

    , cf. 824, etc.;

    ἰκριώσασι ὑ. τὴν ὀροφήν IG12.374.76

    ; ἐργασαμένοις τὸ ἄνθεμον ὑ. τὴν ἀσπίδα ib.371.9;

    τὰ μὲν ὑ. τὸν λόφον καὶ τὰμ φάραγγα Inscr.Prien.37.162

     (ii B.C.);

    ἀνθέντω ὑ. τὸν ναὸν τᾶς Δάματρος IG5(1).1498.13

     (loc. inc., ii B.C.); ὅσσοι ἔασιν ὑπ' ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε everywhere under the sun, Il.5.267;

    ὑπ' αὐγὰς ἠελίοιο φοιτῶσι Od.2.181

    ;

    τῶν ὑ. τοῦτον τὸν ἥλιον.. ἀνθρώπων D.18.270

    ;

    τὰ ὑ. τὴν ἄρκτον Hdt. 5.10

    , cf. Arist.Mete. 362a17;

    οἴκησις ἡ λεγομένη ὑ. τὸν πόλον Gem.5.38

    , cf. 16.21, al.;

    ὑ. τὸν οὐρανόν LXXEx.17.14

    , al., UPZ106.14 (i B.C.);

    τὸ ὑ. τὴν ἀκρόπολιν Th.2.17

    ;

    ὁ ὑ. γῆν λεγόμενος εἶναι θεός Hdt.7.114

    , cf. Il.19.259; ὑ. γῆν is more freq. than ὑ. γῆς in Arist., Mete. 349b29, al., in Hipparch., 1.3.10, al., and entirely supersedes ὑ. γῆς in Hdt., 2.124, 125, 127, 148, 150, 3.102, 4.195, 7.114, and Gem., 2.19, al.; it is found also in Plb.21.28.11, etc.; ὑ. γῆν the nadir, opp. μεσουράνημα, PLond.1.98r.49, 110.33 (i/ii A.D.); also

    ἄγχε δέ μιν.. ἱμὰς ἁπαλὴν ὑ. δειρήν Il.3.371

    ;

    Τρῶες.. πτῶσσον ὑ. κρημνούς 21.26

    ;

    ἀγέροντο.. ἄλσος ὕ. σκιερόν Od.20.278

    ;

    τρωφεὶς ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν IG42(1).122.120

     (Epid., iv B.C.);

    οὐλὴ ὑπ' ὀφθαλμὸν δεξιόν PCair.Zen76.13

     (iii B.C.);

    ὑ. τὸ μέρος τοῦ ἐνοφειλομένου ὑπογραψάτω ὅσον ἰδίᾳ ἔχει PRev.Laws 19.2

     (iii B.C.);

    κείμενος ὑ. τὸν ὀμφαλόν Sor.1.7

    , cf. 67, al.;

    ὑ. τὰς πύλας ἵππων πόδες φαίνονται Th.5.10

    ;

    μὴ ὑποτιθέναι κύλικα ὑ. τὴν κλίνην IG12(5).593

     A21 (Ceos, v B. C.); ὑ. τὸν ὀδόν ib.42(1).102.249 (Epid., iv B.C.);

    καταψύξατε ὑ. τὸ δένδρον LXX Ge.18.4

    ; ὑ. τὸν λέβητα ib.Ec.7.7(6); ὑ. τοὺς πόδας ib.La.3.34;

    εἰς τοὺς ὑ. πόδα χωρεῖ τόπους Dsc.5.75

     (v.

    πούς 1.6

     g); ἡ ὑ. πόδα (sc. γραμμή ) the base of a triangle, Hero *Mens.55; also ὑπ' αὐγὰς.. λεύσσουσαι πέπλους holding them up to the light, E.Hec. 1154; also ὑ. τὸν ὀφθαλμόν close to the eye, Arist. Pr. 874a9;

    ὑποκειμένης τῆς Εὐβοίας ὑ. τὴν Ἀττικήν Isoc.4.108

    ;

    ὑπ' αὐτὴν ἐσχάτην στήλην ἔχων ἔχριμπτ' ἀεὶ σύριγγα S.El. 720

    ;

    εἰ θεωρήσειεν ὑπ' αὐγὰς τὸν ἀνθρώπειον βίον Iamb.Protr.8

     (cf.

    αὐγή 1

    ): of subordinate position.

    κατακλίνεσθαι ὑ. τινά Luc.Symp.9

    ; τίς ὑ. τίνα; who is next to whom, Onos.10.2.
    b Math., ὁ κύβος ὁ ὑ. τὴν.. σφαῖραν inscribed in the sphere, Papp.440.5;

    εἶναι ὑ. τὸ αὐτὸ ὕψος Euc.11.29

    , Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19; ὑ. τὰν αὐτὰν γωνίαν subtending.., Id.Aren. 1.20 (cj.), cf. 21;

    αἱ γωνίαι ὑφ' ἃς αἱ ὁμόλογοι πλευραὶ ὑποτείνουσι Euc.6.6

    ,al.
    II of subjection, control, dependence, never in Hom., once in Hdt.,

    ὑ. βασιλέα δασμοφόρος 7.108

    ;

    ὑ. σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι Th.4.60

    , cf. Pl.R. 348d, Arist. HA 488a10, etc.;

    ἕως κα ᾖ ὑ. τὸν πατέρα Test.Epict.3.29

    ;

    ὑ. τιν' ἦν τῶν βασιλέων Men.340

    ;

    τί δ' οὐ κρατέοντος ὑπ' ἰσχύν; Call.Jov.75

    , cf. 74;

    ὑ. Δία Γῆν Ἥλιον Sammelb. 5616

     (i A.D.), POxy.722.6 (i/ii A.D.), etc. (v.

    ἥλιος 11.1

    );

    ὑ. θεὸν καὶ ἄνθρωπον Michel854.52

     (Halic., iii B.C.);

    τοῦ τοπαρχοῦντος ὑ. σέ PCair.Zen.322.3

     (iii B.C.);

    στρατενσάμενον ὑ. ἄρχοντα Ἀντίοχον IG12(1).43.7

     ([place name] Rhodes);

    μηδὲ ὑ. δεσπότην ὤν LXXPr. 6.7

    , cf. Ps.143.2; for ὑ. χεῖρα, v. χείρ; οἱ ὑ. τινά X.Cyr.3.3.6,8.8.5, etc.;

    τοῖς ὑφ' αὑτὸν τεταγμένοις GDI3750.75

     ([place name] Rhodes).
    III of Time, in the course of, during, or to be left untranslated in English,

    ἐκέλευε Τοωσὶ ποτὶ πτόλιν ἡγήσασθαι νύχθ' ὕ. τήνδ' ὀλοήν Il.22.102

    ;

    ὑ. τὴν νύκτα ταύτην Hdt.9.51

    , cf. 58; ὑ. τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα ἀπέδρη Id 6.2;

    τῆς κολοκύνθης.. ἣ ἐγενήθη ὑ. νύκτα καὶ ὑ. νύκτα ἀπώλετο LXXJn.4.10

    : rarely with stress on the duration, πάνθ' ὑ. μηνιθμόν throughout its continuance, Il.16.202;

    ὑ. τὸν παρεόντα τόνδε πόλεμον Hdt.9.60

    ; οὐδὲν τῶν κατ' Αἴγυπτον ὑ. ταῦτα ἑτεροιωθῆναι during that time, Id.2.142;

    ὑ. τὸν χρόνον ὃν οἱ ἑξήκοντα καὶ τριηκόσιοι ἦρχον οἵδε ἐθεόρεον IG12(8).276.4

     ([place name] Thasos).
    2 also of Time, about, sts. more precisely at, and of events, about or at the time of, ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν χρόνον ὅτε .. Ar.Ach. 139, cf. Hdt.7.165;

    ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν καιρόν Plb. 11.27.4

    , 16.15.8; ὑφ' ἕνα καιρόν at one time, Diog.Oen.38;

    ὑ. τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον Th.2.26

    ;

    ὑ. τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους Id.1.100

    ;

    ὑ. τὸν σεισμόν Id.2.27

    , cf. Plb.4.33.5, Plu.Alex.14; ὑ. τὴν ἑωθινήν, ὑ. τὴν ὄρφνην, Plb. 18.19.5,7;

    ὑ. τὸν ὄρθρον Act.Ap.5.21

    , Gp.2.4.3; ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς περιπάτους ὑ. τὸ ψῦχος in the cool of the morning, Plb.5.56.10; ὑφ' ἓν πάντες all at once, at the same time, Arr.Epict.3.22.33, cf. S.E.M. 10.124, Sor.1.103, al.; παιδάριον ὑ. τὴν ἀναπνοὴν ἑπτὰ καὶ πέντε στίχους συνεῖρον in one breath, Plb.10.47.9; ὑφ' ἓν ἐκτρῖψαι at one blow, LXX Wi.12.9; ὑ. μίαν ἄρσιν καὶ θέσιν ἀνατείνοντες καὶ κατατιθέμενοι, of a squad of diggers, Gp.2.45.5; ὑ. μίαν φωνήν Aristeas 178; πῶς γὰρ ἂν ὑ. τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας ἔν τε τῇ Ἰταλίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Κιλικίᾳ.. πολεμήσειε; at the same time, D.C.36.35; sts. c. part., ὑ. τὸν νηὸν κατακαέντα at the time of its burning, Hdt.1.51; ὑ. τὴν κατάλυσιν τοῦ πολέμου just at the end, X.Mem.2.8.1, cf. Plu.Mar.46; ὑ. τὸν θυμὸν ἐκ χειρὸς ἐπιστρατευσαμένων at the very time of their anger, Plb. 2.19.10;

    ὑ. παροξυσμόν Gal.19.215

    ; παραδόντω τοῖς αἱρεθεῖσι εἰς τὸν ὑπ' αὐτὰ (or ὕπαυτα as Adv. = ἑξῆς)

    ἐνιαυτόν IG9(1).694.60

     (Corc., ii/i B.C.);

    ὑ. κύνα Arist.HA 547a14

    , Thphr.CP1.13.3, D.S.19.109;

    ὑ. τὰς θερινὰς [τροπὰς] καὶ τοῦ κυνὸς τὴν ἐπιτολήν Gp.2.6.17

    .
    IV of accompaniment,

    ὑπὸ ὄρχησίν τε καὶ ᾠδήν Pl.Lg. 670a

    ;

    ὑ. αὐλὸν διαλέγεσθαι X.Smp.6.3

     codd. (ὑ. τοῦ αὐλοῦ Cobet); ὑ. κήρυκα (v.

    κῆρυξ 1.3

    ).—Compare A.11.5, B.11.4.
    2 ὄνον ἕνα ὑ. λαχανόσπερμον laden with.., Meyer Ostr.81.2 (i A. D.), cf. PFay.p.324 (i A.D.);

    ὄνοι ὑ. δένδρα BGU 362i6

    , al. (iii A.D.); cf. supr. A.11.8.
    D POSITION: ὑ. can follow its Subst., becoming by anastrophe ὕπο. It is freq. separated from the Subst. by intervening words, as in Il.2.465, Od.5.320, 7.130:— ὑπαί is placed after its case in A. Eu. 417, S.El. 1418, Inach. l.c., although acc. to Hdn.Gr.1.480 it cannot suffer anastrophe.
    E AS ADV., under, below, beneath, freq. in Hom.; esp. of young animals, under the mother, i.e. at the breast, Od.4.636, 21.23.
    2 behind, Hdt.7.61: cf. C. 1.
    II ὑπ' ἐκ or ὑπέκ, v. ὑπέκ.—In Hom. the separation of the Prep. from its Verb by tmesis is very freq., and sts. it follows, in which case it suffers anastrophe,

    φυγὼν ὕπο νηλεὲς ἦμαρ Od.9.17

    .
    F IN COMPOSITION:
    I under, as well of rest as of motion, as in ὕπειμι, ὑποβαίνω, etc.
    2 of the casing or covering of one thing with another, as ὑπάργυρος, ὑπόχρυσος.
    3 of the agency or influence under which a thing is done, to express subjection or subordination, ὑποδαμνάω, ὑποδμώς, ὑφηνίοχος, cf. ἐπί G. 111.
    II denoting what is in small degree or gradual, somewhat, a little, as in ὑποκινέω, ὑποδεής, ὑπόλευκος (so in tmesi,

    ὑ. τι ἀσεβῆ Pl.Phdr. 242d

    , cf. Grg. 493c;

    ὑ. τι μικρὸν ἐπιθήκισα Ar.V. 1290

     (lyr.)).
    III underhand, secretly, as in ὑποθέω, ὑποθωπεύω, ὑποκορίζομαι, ὑπόρνυμι.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑπό

  • 5 ὑπό

    ὑπό (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, En, TestSol; TestAbr A; TestAbr B 14 p. 148, 20 [Stone p. 84 gen.]; TestJob, Test12Patr, JosAs, ParJer, GrBar [gen.], ApcEsdr [gen.], ApcSed [gen.], ApcMos [gen.], AscIs [gen.], EpArist, Philo, Joseph.; apolog. [in Ath. only gen.]) prep. w. gen. and acc., in our lit. not w. dat. (s. B-D-F §203; Rob. 634; for usage s. B-D-F §232; Rob. 633–36; w. dat. TestSol 13:6 C; Just., D. 126, 5; 132, 2).—Lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg.
    A. w. gen. marker of agency or cause, by (in our lit. as well as the LXX no longer in a local sense)
    ⓐ w. the pass. of a verb
    α. w. gen. of pers. τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ κυρίου (cp. Gen 45:27; SIG 679, 85; Just., D. 44, 1 εἰρῆσθαι ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ; τὰ εἰρημένα ὑπὸ τῶν προφητῶν) Mt 1:22 (Jos., Ant. 8, 223 ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ διὰ τ. προφήτου; Just., A I, 5, 4 διὰ Σωκράτους ὑπὸ λόγου); 2:15. Cp. vs. 16; Mk 1:13; Lk 2:18; J 14:21; Ac 4:11; 1 Cor 1:11; 2 Cor 1:4; Gal 1:11; Eph 2:11; Phil 3:12; 1 Th 1:4; 1 Cl 12:2; 2 Cl 1:2; Hm 4, 3, 6 and oft.; AcPlCor 2:7. Also w. the pass. in the sense ‘allow oneself to be … by’ Mt 3:6, 13; Mk 1:5, 9.
    β. w. gen. of thing (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 5 ὑπὸ λιμοῦ ἀπολέσθαι; Diod S 5, 54, 3 ὑπὸ σεισμῶν διεφθάρησαν; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 22 p. 342, 17 Jac. ὑπὸ φαρμακῶν διαφθαρείς; Appian, Liby. 35 §147 ὑπὸ τοῦ χειμῶνος κατήγοντο, Bell. Civ. 4, 123 §515; Longus 2, 18 a nose smashed ὑπὸ πληγῆς τινος; Herm. Wr. 10, 4b; Tat. 8, 5 ὑπὸ βραχείας αὔρας νικηθείς; UPZ 42, 9 [162 B.C.]) καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων Mt 8:24. Cp. 11:7; 14:24; Lk 7:24; 8:14; Ac 27:41; Ro 3:21; 12:21; 1 Cor 10:29; 2 Cor 5:4; Col 2:18; Js 1:14; 3:4ab; 2 Pt 2:17; Jd 12; Rv 6:13; Hm 10, 1, 4.
    ⓑ w. verbs and verbal expressions that have a pass. sense πάσχειν ὑπό τινος (Mel., P. 75, 546ff; s. πάσχω 3aβ; 3b) Mt 17:12; Mk 5:26; 1 Th 2:14ab. ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν B 5:5 (cp. Mel., P. 96, 737 ὑπὸ δεξιᾶς Ἰσραηλίτιδος). ἀπολέσθαι 1 Cor 10:9f (Jos., Ant. 2, 300; cp. Sb 1209 Ἀπολλώνιος ἐτελεύτησεν ὑπὸ σκορπίου). ὑπομένειν ἀντιλογίαν Hb 12:3. τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν λαβεῖν 2 Cor 11:24. ἃ … παρέλαβον ὑπὸ τῶν … ἀποστόλων what I received from the apostles AcPlCor 2:2; ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ἀναστάς raised by God Pol 9:2. γίνεσθαι ὑπό τινος be done by someone (s. γίνομαι 2a) Lk 13:17; 23:8; Ac 20:3; 26:6; Eph 5:12. Cp. Ac 23:30 v.l. The text of GJs 18:3 (not pap) is suspect. W. ὑπὸ γυναικός Hv 1, 2, 3 someth. like ‘it was brought about’ is to be supplied.
    ⓒ w. nouns ἡ ἐπιτιμία ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων the punishment at the hands of the majority 2 Cor 2:6 (cp. X., Cyr. 3, 3, 2 ἡ ὑπὸ πάντων τιμή; SIG 1157, 10 διὰ τὰς εὐεργεσίας τὰς ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ; Esth 1:20 ὁ νόμος ὁ ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως).
    ⓓ When used w. an act., ὑπό introduces the one through whose agency the action expressed by the verb becomes poss. (Hdt. 9, 98; Pla., Phlb. 66a ὑπʼ ἀγγέλων φράζειν=‘say through messengers’; cp. Herm. Wr. 9, 9 ὑπὸ δεισιδαιμονίας βλασφημεῖν; Just., D. 2, 6 ὑπὸ βλακείας ἤλπιζον αὐτίκα κατόψεσθαι τὸν θεόν=in my stupidity I thought that I would forthwith look upon God) ἀποκτεῖναι ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων Rv 6:8. ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου βλέπεις you see under the guidance of an angel Hs 9, 1, 2b; cp. ibid. 2a and s. Mayser II/2, 511f; to the ref. there add PLeid XI, 1, col. 1, 15.
    B. w. acc.
    ① a position below an object or another position, under, w. acc. of place under, below
    ⓐ answering the question ‘whither?’ ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 16:17; Hs 8, 1, 1 (PsSol 18:7). εἰσέρχεσθαι ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην Mt 8:8 (cp. Ar. 15, 7 ὑπὸ στέγην εἰσάγουσιν); Lk 7:6. συνάγειν 1 Cl 12:6. ἐπισυνάγειν Mt 23:37; Lk 13:34. τιθέναι Mt 5:15; Mk 4:21ab; Lk 11:33. κρύπτειν (cp. Job 20:12) 1 Cl 12:3. Also (below) at κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου Js 2:3 (cp. ParJer 5:1 ἐκάθισεν ὑπὸ τὴν σκίαν; Just., D. 107, 3). ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας under the feet (Hdt. 7, 88, 1) 1 Cor 15:25, 27; Eph 1:22. ὁ θεὸς συντρίψει τὸν σατανᾶν ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας ὑμῶν God will crush Satan so that he will lie at your feet Ro 16:20.
    ⓑ in answer to the question ‘where?’ (Il. 5, 267; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 734 D.: τὰ ὑπὸ τὸν ἥλιον; Maximus Tyr. 35, 5b) Mk 4:32. ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν J 1:48. Cp. Ro 3:13 (Ps 13:3; 139:4); 1 Cor 10:1; Jd 6. ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν under heaven=on earth Ac 4:12; as adj. ὁ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν (found) under heaven=on earth (Demosth. 18, 270; UPZ 106, 14 [99 B.C.] τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν; Just., A II, 5, 2; cp. without the art. PsSol 2:32; TestAbr A 15 p. 96, 5 [Stone p. 40]) 2:5; Col 1:23; Hm 12, 4, 2; ἡ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν (χώρα to be supplied; cp. Ex 17:14; Job 28:24) Lk 17:24a; cp. b. ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι (ζυγός 1) 1 Ti 6:1.
    ② marker of that which is in a controlling position, under, under the control of, under obligation in ref. to power, rule, sovereignty, command, etc. w. acc. (OGI 56, 13 [237 B.C.] ὑπὸ τὴν βασιλείαν τασσόμενοι; PHib 44 [253 B.C.] et al. in pap; Just., D. 52, 4 εἶναι … ὑπὸ ἴδιον βασιλέα) ἄνθρωπος ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος (ἐξουσία 4) Lk 7:8a; cp. Mt 8:9a; Hs 1:3 (Vett. Val. 209, 35 ὑπὸ ἑτέρων ἐξουσίαν ὄντας). ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας (Polyb. 4, 87, 9 Μεγαλέαν ὑφʼ αὐτὸν εἶχεν) Mt 8:9b; Lk 7:8b (OGI 86, 11 [III B.C.] οἱ ὑπʼ αὐτὸν τεταγμένοι στρατιῶται). ὑπό τινα εἶναι be under someone’s power (Thu. 6, 86, 4; PSI 417, 36 [III B.C.] ὑπὸ τὸν ὅρκον εἶναι) Gal 3:25; 4:2; ὑφʼ ἁμαρτίαν Ro 3:9; ὑπὸ νόμον 6:14, 15 (both opp. ὑπὸ χάριν); 1 Cor 9:20abcd; Gal 4:21; 5:18; ὑπὸ κατάραν 3:10. ὑπὸ νόμον ἐφρουρούμεθα vs. 23. γενόμενος ὑπὸ νόμον Gal 4:4 (γινομαι 9d and Thu. 1, 110, 2 Αἴγυπτος ὑπὸ βασιλέα ἐγένετο). ὑπὸ τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου ἤμεθα δεδουλωμένοι vs. 3. συνέκλεισεν ἡ γραφὴ τὰ πάντα ὑπὸ ἁμαρτίαν 3:22 (s. συγκλείω 2). πεπραμένος ὑπὸ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν Ro 7:14. ταπεινώθητε ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖρα τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Pt 5:6 (s. ταπεινόω 3); cp. οὐκ ἔκλινας τὴν κεφαλήν σου ὑπὸ τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖραν GJs 15:4; τὸ αἷμά σου ὑπὸ τὴν χεῖράν μού ἐστιν 23:2. οἱ ὑπὸ νόμον those who are under (the power of, obligation to) the law Gal 4:5 (Just., D. 45, 3 [w. art.]; cp. X., Cyr. 3, 3, 6 τινὰς τῶν ὑφʼ ἑαυτούς).
    ③ marker of the approximate time of a period, about w. acc. (w. varying degrees of precision: in earlier Gk.: Aristoph et al.; PTebt 50, 18 [112 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 420. Rare in LXX and our lit.) ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον about daybreak Ac 5:21 (s. ὄρθρος).
    ④ Special uses
    ⓐ ὑφʼ ἕν at one stroke (Epict. 3, 22, 33; Wsd 12:9; Just., D. 65, 3 of topics treated ‘collectively’) B 4:4. ὑπὸ χεῖρα continually (see s.v. χείρ 3) Hv 3, 10, 7; 5, 5; m 4, 3, 6.
    ⓑ ὑπὸ τὰ ἴχνη IEph 12:2 is translated in the footsteps. Can ὑπό mean this, someth. like Ezk 13:8 (ed. JZiegler ’52 v.l.), where it stands for עַל? But if it = ‘under’, then τὰ ἴχνη would require a different interpretation. See ἴχνος 2. S. the grammarians: Kühner-Gerth II/1 521–26; Schwyzer II 522–23; Mayser II/2 509–15; Radermacher 114–19.—DELG. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὑπό

  • 6 λόγος

    -ου + ὁ N 2 54-342-344-246-252=1238 Gn 4,23; 29,13; 34,18; Ex 4,28; 5,9
    word (stereotypical rendition of דבר) Gn 4,23; word of God Nm 11,23; word, message, oracle (of God) Jer 1,4; deliberation Jb 7,13; question, request 2 Sm 14,22; word of command Ex 4,28; case, cause Jb 22,4; condition, promise 2 Sm 3,13; thing spoken of, matter Ex 18,19; event 2 Sm 11,19; account 1 Mc
    10,42; accounts, treasury, revenue 1 Mc 10,44; (some)thing (semit., rendering Hebr. דבר) 1 Kgs 5,1(7)
    λόγῳ seemingly 3 Mc 3,17; εἰς φερνῆς λόγον on account of the dowry 2 Mc 1,14; παρὰ λόγον illegal, without cause 2 Mc 4,36; κατὰ λόγον according to one’s expectations, as one wishes 3 Mc 3,14; ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ by all means, i.e. with all (his) intellect Est 1,1l; ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ in word and deed Sir 3,8; μὴ λόγον ἔχε τοῦ δαιμονίου τούτου do not take care of this demon, do not take this demon into consideration TobS 6,16; μὴ δότω ὁ βασιλεὺς κατὰ τοῦ δούλου αὐτοῦ λόγον let not the king bring a
    charge against his servant 1 Sm 22,15; τοῦ ἀποδιδόναι αὐτοῖς τοὺς σατράπας λόγον for the satraps to give account to them DnTh 6,3; λόγον οὐκ ἔχουσιν πρὸς ἄνθρωπον they had no intercourse with any one JgsB 18,7; ἐρωτήσω σε λόγον I shall ask you a question Jer 45(38),14; ἠμφιέσαντο λόγους they clothed their words, they embellished their words, they concealed their plans, they acted secretly 2 Kgs 17,9; οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten command-ments Ex 34,28; βιβλίον λόγων τῶν ἡμερῶν Book of the Chronicles 1 Kgs 14,29; ὁ παντοδύναμος λόγος the al-mighty Word, hypostatic manifestation of the Lord’s power Wis 18,15
    *Jb 7,13 ἰδίᾳ λόγον ? corr.? δία λόγον for MT יחישׂ/ב ⋄יחשׂ in my complaint, in my concern; *Prv 26,18 λόγους words corr. λόγχας? lances for MT זקים arrows of fire; *2 Chr 34,24 τοὺς πάντας λόγους all the words-כל־הדברים (see 2 Kgs 22,16) for MT כל־האלות all the curses; *Is 10,23 λόγον word, matter מלה for MT כלה consumption; *Mi 1,2 λόγους words-מלים for MT כלם all of them; *Hab 3,5 λόγος word-ָבר דָּ for MT ֶבר דֶּ pestilence, see also Ps 90(91),3; *DnLX X 12,3 τοὺς λόγους the words- הדברים? for MT (=Theod.) הרבים many
    Cf. BARR 1961 129-140.220-222.236-237.249; DODD 1954 115-121 and passim; DOGNIEZ 1992 41-
    43.341-342; HARL 1971=1992a 189.244 (Is 10,23); JEANSONNE 1988 77-78 (Dn 12,3); LARCHER 1984
    565; 1985 910.1015- 1016.1018-1022 (Wis 18,15-16); LE BOULLUEC 1989 58.205.346; REPO 1951, 1-
    204; →NIDNTT

    Lust (λαγνεία) > λόγος

  • 7 ἀκρατής

    ἀκρατ-ής, ές, ([etym.] κράτος)
    A powerless, impotent,

    γῆρας S.OC 1236

    ;

    παιδία Hp.

    Aër.10; of paralysed limbs, IG4.951.22 (Epid.), Aret.SD1.7.
    2 in Law, invalid,

    πρῆσις GDI5653

     ([place name] Chios), cf. IG12(8).267.12 ([place name] Thasos).
    II c. gen. rei, not having power or command over a thing,

    γλώσσης A.Pr. 884

    ; φωνῆς, παντὸς τοῦ σώματος, ἑωυτοῦ, Hp.Morb.1.3, Art.48, Morb.2.6;

    ὀργῆς Th.3.84

    ;

    θυμοῦ Pl.Lg. 869a

    ; ἀ. τῶν χειρῶν, of persons with their hands tied, D.H.1.38; intemperate in the use of a thing, ἀφροδισίων, οἴνου, X.Mem.1.2.2, Oec.12.11; ἀ. κέρδους, τιμῆς intemperate in pursuit of them, Arist.EN 1147b33; with Preps.,

    ἀ. πρὸς τὸν οἶνον Id.HA 594a10

    ;

    περὶ τὰ πόματα Id.PA 691a3

    : c. inf., ἀ. εἴργεσθαί τινος unable to refrain from.., Pl.Sph. 252c. Adv. - τῶς, [dialect] Ion.

    -τέως, διακεῖσθαι Hp.

    Acut.(Sp.)55.
    2 abs. in moral sense, without command over oneself or one's passions, incontinent, Arist.EN 1145b11;

    ἀ. στόμα Ar.Ra. 838

    ;

    νηδύς Aristias 3

    . Adv.

    ἀκρατῶς, ἔχειν πρός τι Pl. Lg. 710a

    .
    3 of things, uncontrolled, immoderate,

    δαπάνη AP 9.367

     (Luc.); οὖρον.. ἀκρατές incontinence of urine, Aret.SA1.6; cf. ἀκρᾰτί.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀκρατής

  • 8 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    ① a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    ⓐ of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    ⓑ of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    ② computation, reckoning
    ⓐ a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    ⓑ settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    ⓒ reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    ⓓ reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    ⓔ πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    ⓕ In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    ③ the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 9 πάρειμι

    A sum), inf. - εῖναι, [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl.

    παρέᾱσι Il.5.192

    , Od.13.247 ; [dialect] Ion. subj.

    παρέω Hdt.4.98

    ; [dialect] Ep. inf.

    παρέμμεναι Od.4.640

    , part.

    παρεών Il.24.475

     : [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.

    παρέην Od.3.267

     (tm.); [ per.] 2sg. παρῆας v.l. in Od.4.497 (Sch., Lex.Mess.) ; [ per.] 3pl.

    πάρεσαν Il. 11.75

    ; [dialect] Att. [tense] impf.

    παρῆ A.Ch. 523

    ; in later Greek

    παρήμην Luc.VH2.25

     : [dialect] Ep. [tense] fut.

    παρέσσομαι Od. 13.393

     :— to be by or present,

    ὑμεῖς θεαί ἐστε πάρεστέ τε ἴστε τε πάντα Il. 2.485

    , etc.: in tmesi,

    πὰρ δ' ἄρ' ἔην καὶ ἀοιδός Od. 3.267

     ; πάρα used for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il. 20.98, 23.479, etc.: freq. in part.,

    ποίπνυον παρεόντε 24.475

     ; σημάντορος οὐ π. 15.325, etc. ;

    ἀπεόντα νόῳ παρεόντα Parm. 2.1

    , cf. Heraclit. 34.
    2 to be by or near one, c. dat., Od.5.105;

    μήλοισι 4.640

    ;

    π. τινὶ παροινοῦντι Antipho 4.1.7

     ;

    π. παρά τινι S.Ph. 1056

    ; π. τινί to be his guest, Ar.Av. 131.
    4 to be present so as to help, stand by, τινι Il.18.472, Od.13.393, A.Pers. 235 ;

    πλησίον παρῆσθα κινδύνων ἐμοί E.Or. 1159

    , etc.; esp. of one accused,

    οἱ νῦν παρόντες αὐτῷ καὶ συνδικοῦντες D.34.12

    , cf. 24.159 : Medic., of nurses, assistants, etc., Hp.Aph.1.1, Herod. [voice] Med. ap. Orib. 10.37.11.
    5 παρεῖναι εἰς .. to have arrived at,

    ἐς κοῖτον Hdt.1.9

    ;

    ἐς τὸν Ἰσθμὸν π. τινί Id.8.60

    .

    γ ; ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα Th.6.88

     ;

    εἰς τὴν ἐξέτασιν X.An.7.1.11

     ;

    Ὀλυμπίαζε Th.3.8

     : c. acc. loci,

    πάρεισι.. Αἰτναῖον πάγον E. Cyc.95

    , cf. 106, Ba.5 ;

    π. τινὶ ἐπὶ δεῖπνον Hdt. 1.118

    , cf. Ar.Av. 131 ;

    π. ἐπὶ τὸ στράτευμα X.An.7.1.35

     ; π. πρὸς τὴν κρίσιν ib. 6.6.26 ;

    πρός τινα Id.Cyr.2.4.21

     ; also

    π. ἐνταυθοῖ Pl.Ap. 33d

     ; v. πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι) IV. 2.
    6 π. ἐκ .. to have come from..,

    ἐκ ταύτης [τῆς πόλιος] π. ἐς τὴν Ἀσίην Hdt.6.24

    ;

    τοὐκ θεοῦ παρόν S. OC 1540

    ; Φίλιππος ἐκ Θρᾴκης π. Aeschin.2.101;

    Θείβαθεν αὐληταὶ πάρα Ar.Ach. 862

    .
    II of things, to be by, i.e. ready or at hand,

    τά τε δμώεσσι πάρεστι Od.14.80

    , etc.;

    πάρα ἔργα βόεσσιν Hes. Op. 454

    ;

    οὐ γάρ οἱ πάρα νῆες Od.4.559

     ; εἴ μοι δύναμίς γε παρείη if power were at my command, 2.62 ;

    ὅση δύναμίς γε πάρεστι 23.128

     ;

    ὅ τι πάρεστι Men. 62

    ; τὰ παρεόντα what is ready,

    χαριζομένη παρεόντων Od.1.140

    ;

    ἡ τοῦ πλέονος ἐπιθυμίη τὸ παρεὸν ἀπόλλυσι Democr.224

    , cf. 191; ἐκ τῶν παρεουσέων αὐγέων the best light available, Hp.Off.3;

    ἐκ τῶν παρεόντων τὸ εὔπορον εὑρίσκειν Id.Art.78

    ; εἰ τὰ δεσμὰ μὴ παρείη ibid.; of feelings, conditions, etc.,

    φόβος βαρβάροις παρῆν A.Pers. 391

     ;

    θαῦμα παρῆν S.Ant. 254

     ;

    ἐν τοῖς τότε παρεοῦσι.. κακοῖσι Hdt.8.20

    , cf. A.Pr.26;

    ὡς παρεσομένου σφι πολέμου Hdt.8.20

     : in Philos., of qualities or predicates, παρείη γ' ἂν αὐταῖς (sc. θριξίν)

    λευκότης Pl.Ly. 217d

    , cf. Plot. 5.6.4; of Time,

    ὁ παρὼν νῦν χρόνος S.El. 1293

    , cf. Aeschin.1.93, Arist.Po. 1457a18;

    ἡ νῦν π. ἡμέρα Pl.Lg. 683c

    ; ἡ ἱερὰ συμβουλὴ π. X.An.5.6.4; τὰ παρόντα ([dialect] Ion. παρεόντα) the present state of affairs, Hdt.1.113, etc.;

    τὰ π. πρήγματα Id.6.100

    ; opp. τὰ γεγονότα, τὰ μέλλοντα, Pl.Tht. 186b : sg., τὸ παρόν ([dialect] Ion. παρεόν) , πρὸς τὸ π. βουλεύειν, τὸ π. θεραπεύειν, Hdt.1.20, S.Ph. 149 (lyr.);

    πρὸς παρεόν Emp.106

     : Adverbial phrases, τὸ παρόν just now,

    τὸ π. εἴπομεν Pl.Lg. 693b

    ;

    τὰ παρόντα S.El. 215

     (lyr.): in Prose, ἐκ τῶν π. according to present circumstances, Th.5.40, etc.; ἐν τῷ π., opp. τὸ ἔπειτα, ib.63, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ νῦν π. καὶ ἐν τῷ ἔπειτα Pl.Phd. 67c

    ; ἐν τῷ τότε π. Th.1.95;

    πρὸς τὸ παρόν Isoc. 15.94

    ; ὡς πρὸς τὸ π. S.E.P.1.201;

    πρὸς τὸ π. αὐτίκα Th.3.40

    ;

    πρὸς τὴν π. ὄψιν Id.2.88

    ; ἐπὶ τοῦ π. for the present, IG9(2).517.6 (Epist. Philipp.), Epict.Ench. 2.2; ἐς and πρὸς τὰ π., Arr.An.1.13.5, 5.22.5.
    III impers., πάρεστί μοι it depends on me, is in my power to do, c. inf.,

    τοιαῦθ' ἑλέσθαι σοι πάρεστιν ἐξ ἐμοῦ A.Eu. 867

    , cf. S.Ph. 364, etc.: also [tense] impf.

    παρῆν Hdt.8.20

    , 9.70 : without dat.,

    παρῆν.. κλύειν A.Pers. 401

    ;

    πάρεστι χαίρειν Ar.Pl. 638

    ;

    ὁρᾶν πάρεστιν Democr.164

    , cf. And.2.2, etc.
    2 part. παρόν, [dialect] Ion. παρεόν, it being possible or easy, since it is allowed,

    παρεὸν αὐτῷ βασιλέα γενέσθαι Hdt. 1.129

    , cf. 6.72, S.Ph. 1098 (lyr.), Fr.564.3, Th.4.19.
    IV. part. masc. παρών is freq. in Trag., at the end of a verse, to give vividness, ἄνδρ' ἐνουθέτει παρών to his face, S.Aj. 1156; τοὺς θανόντας οὐκ ἐᾶς θάπτειν π. you come here and forbid.., ib. 1131, cf. 338, El. 300, Tr. 422; dub. in Com., Ar.Fr. 657.
    -------------------------------------------
    A ibo), inf. - ιέναι ([dialect] Dor. - ίμεν Berl.Sitzb.1927.170 ([place name] Cyrene)), used as [tense] fut. of παρέρχομαι, also in [tense] pres. sense, παρῄειν being used as [tense] impf. :—pass by, pass,

    παριών Od.4.527

    , 17.233;

    οἰκτίρας.. παρίτω IG12.976

     ;

    παρήϊε Hdt.4.79

    ;

    οἱ ἀεὶ παριόντες Pl.R. 616a

    , etc.; go alongside, Th.4.47 ; march along the coast, of an army, Id.8.16, 22,32, X.HG2.1.18 (cj.), 4.5.19.
    2 c.acc. loci, pass by, Hdt.7.109 ;

    τὸν χῶρον Id.1.167

     ;

    τὴν οἰκίαν And.1.146

    , Str. 14.5.14 ; π. παρὰ τοὺς πατέρας (prob. for παρῆσαν) Hdt.3.14 ; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν Βαβυλῶνα π. X.Cyr.5.2.29.
    II pass by, overtake, surpass, ib.1.4.5.
    III pass on, esp. in the sense of entering,

    π. ἐς τὰ βασιλήϊα Hdt. 3.84

    , cf. 72,77, Pl.Phd. 59e; ἔσω π. E.Hel. 451 ;

    πάριτ' ἐς θυμέλας, ἐπὶ δ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι δόμων μὴ πάριτ' ἐς μυχόν Id. Ion 228

     (anap.) ;

    βίᾳ εἰς οἰκίαν παριέναι X.Cyr.1.2.2

    .
    2 in discourse, pass on from one part of a subject to another, ἐντεῦθεν ἐς .. Ar.Nu. 1075 ; ὃ παριὼν τῷ λόγῳ ἔτυχον εἰπών in passing, Pl.Lg. 776d.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πάρειμι

  • 10 ἀρχή

    ἀρχή, ἡ, (v. ἄρχω)
    A beginning, origin,

    νείκεος ἀ. Il.22.116

    ;

    πήματος Od.8.81

    ;

    φόνου 21.4

    , etc.; opp. τέλος, Hdt.7.51, etc.; opp. τελευτή, Thgn.607, cf. Pl.Lg. 715e, Hp.Morb.1.1;

    ἀ. γενέσθαι κακῶν Hdt.5.97

    ;

    ἀ. ποιήσασθαί τινος Th.1.128

    , And.2.37, Isoc.12.120, etc.;

    ἀ. λαβεῖν τινός Aeschin.1.11

    ;

    τὰς ἀρχὰς εἰληφέναι Plb.4.28.3

    ; ἀρχὴν ὑποθέσθαι lay a foundation, D.3.2, etc.;

    βαλέσθαι Pl.Ep. 326e

     (and [voice] Pass.,

    ἀρχαὶ βέβληνται Pi.N.1.8

    );

    ἀρχὴν ἄρχεσθαί τινος Pl.Ti. 36e

    ; source of action, [

    ὁ ἄνθρωπος] ἔχει ἀρχὴν ἐλευθέραν Plot.3.3.4

    .
    b with Preps. in adverbial usages, ἐξ ἀρχῆς from the beginning, from the first, from of old, Od.1.188, Xenoph.10, etc.;

    οὑξ ἀ. φίλος S.OT 385

    ;

    ἡ ἐξ ἀ. ἔχθρα D.54.3

    ;

    τὸ ἐξ ἀ. X.Cyn.12.6

    ; but

    πλουτεῖν ἐξ ἀ. πάλιν

     anew, afresh,

    Ar.Pl. 221

    ;

    λόγον πάλιν ὥσπερ ἐξ ἀ. κινεῖν Pl.R. 450a

    ; ὁ ἐξ ἀ. λόγος the original argument, Id.Tht. 177c, etc.; τὰ ἐξ ἀ. the principal sum, Arist.Pol. 1280a30:—also

    ἀπ' ἀ. Hes.Th. 425

    , Hdt.2.104, Pi.P.8.25, A.Supp. 344, Pl.Tht. 206d; κατ' ἀρχάς in the beginning, at first, Hdt.3.153, 7.5;

    αὐτίκα κατ' ἀ. Id.8.94

    ;

    τὸ κατ' ἀ. Pl. Lg. 798a

    , al.
    c acc. ἀρχήν, abs., to begin with, at first, Hdt. 1.9, 2.28, 8.132;

    τὴν ἀρχήν And.3.20

    : pl.,

    τὰς ἀρχάς Plb.16.22.8

    : freq. followed by a neg., not at all,

    ἀρχὴν μηδὲ λαβών Hdt.3.39

    , cf. 1.193, al.;

    ἀ. δὲ θηρᾶν οὐ πρέπει τἀμήχανα S.Ant.92

    ;

    ἀ. κλύειν ἂν οὐκ.. ἐβουλόμην Id.Ph. 1239

    , cf. El. 439, Philol.3, Antipho5.73, Pl. Grg. 478c; sts. c. Art.,

    τοῦτο οὐκ ἐνδέκομαι τὴν ἀ. Hdt.4.25

    ;

    τὴν ἀ. γὰρ ἐξῆν αὐτῷ μὴ γράφειν D.23.93

    .
    2 first principle, element, first so used by Anaximander, acc. to Simp. in Ph.150.23, cf. Arist. Metaph. 983b11, etc.;

    Ἡράκλειτος τὴν ἀ. εἶναί φησι ψυχήν Id.de An. 405a25

    ; of ὕλη and θεός, opp. στοιχεῖα, Placit.1.3.25; practical principle of conduct,

    τῶν πράξεων τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς ὑποθέσεις D. 2.10

    ; principles of knowledge, Arist.Metaph. 995b8, al.
    3 end, corner, of a bandage, rope, sheet, etc., Hdt.4.60, Hp.Off.9, E.Hipp. 762, Aen.Tact.18.14, Act.Ap.10.11; of a compound pulley, Hero Bel.84.14.
    4 Math., origin of a curve,

    τῆς ἕλικος Archim.Spir. 11

     Def.2, etc.;

    ξυνὸν ἀ. καὶ πέρας ἐπὶ κύκλου περιφερείας Heraclit. 103

    .
    5 branch of a river, LXX Ge.2.10 (pl.).
    6 sum, total, ib.Nu.1.2.
    7 vital organs of the body, Gal.1.318, al.
    II first place or power, sovereignty (not in Hom.),

    Διὸς ἀρχά Pi.O.2.64

    , cf. Hdt.1.6, etc.;

    γενέσθαι ἐπ' ἀρχῆς Arist.Pol. 1284b2

    : metaph., μεγάλην μεντἂν ἀ. εἴης εὑρηκώς, of a stroke of fortune, D.21.196: pl.,

    ἀρχαὶ πολισσονόμοι A.Ch. 864

     (lyr.);

    τὰς ἐμὰς ἀρχὰς σέβων S.Ant. 744

    , etc.: c. gen. rei,

    τῆσδ' ἔχων ἀρχὴν χθονός S.OT 737

    ; ἀ. τῶν νεῶν, τῆς θαλάσσης, power over them, Th.3.90, X.Ath.2.7, etc.: prov., ἀ. ἄνδρα δείξει Biasap.Arist.EN 1130a1, cf. D.Prooem.48; method of government,

    οὐδὲ τὴν ἄλλην ἀ. ἐπαχθής Th.6.54

    .
    2 empire, realm, Κύρου, Περδίκκου ἀ., Hdt.1.91, Th.4.128, etc.
    3 magistracy, office, ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν, παραλαμβάνειν, Hdt.3.80, 4.147;

    καταστήσας τὰς ἀ. καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐπιστήσας Id.3.89

    ; εἰς ἀ. καθίστασθαι Th.8.70; εἰς τὴν ἀ. εἰσιέναι D.59.72, etc.; ἀ. λαχεῖν to obtain an office, Id.57.25;

    Ἑλληνοταμίαι τότε πρῶτον κατέστη ἀ. Th.1.96

    ;

    ἐνιαύσιος ἀ. Id.6.54

    ; ἀ. χειροτονητή, κληρωτή, Lex ap.Aeschin.1.21; withsg. Noun,

    Κυθηροδίκης ἀ. ἐκ τῆς Σπάρτης διέβαινεν αὐτόσε Th.4.53

    ; term of office,

    ἀρχῆς λοιποὶ αὐτῷ δύο μῆνες Antipho6.42

    ;

    ἀρχαὶ καὶ λειτουργίαι POxy.119.16

     (iii A.D.).
    4 in pl.,

    αἱ ἀρχαί

     the authorities, the magistrates,

    Th.5.47

    , cf. Decr. ap. And.1.83; ἐν ταῖς ἀ. εἶναι Th.6.54; ἡ ἀρχή collectively, 'the board', D.47.22, cf. IG1.229, etc.;

    παραδιδόναι τινὰ τῇ ἀ. Antipho5.48

    ; but ἡ ἀ., of a single magistrate, PHal.1.226 (iii B.C.); κατ' ἀρχῆς γὰρ φιλαίτιος λεώς against authority, A.Supp. 485;

    πομποὺς ἀρχάς Id.Ag. 124

     (anap.).
    5 command, i.e. body of troops, LXX 1 Ki.13.17, al.
    6 pl., heavenly powers, Ep.Rom.8.38, al., cf. Dam. Pr.96; powers of evil, Ep.Eph.6.12, al.
    III = εἶδος μελίσσης ἀκέντρου, Hsch.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀρχή

  • 11 ὑποχείριος

    ὑποχείρ-ιος, ον, Pl.Tht. 198a, Plt. 308a; ος, α, ον, Id.Erx. 392c, Hdt.5.91: ([etym.] χείρ):—
    A under the hand, in hand,

    χρυσὸν ὅτις χ' ὑποχείριος ἔλθῃ Od.15.448

    , cf. Anon. ap. Suid., and v. πρόχειρος.
    2 mostly of persons, under any one's hand or control, under command, subject, τισι Hdt.6.33,44; ὑ. εἶναι, γενέσθαι τισί, ib. 119, A.Supp. 392 (lyr.), X.An.3.2.3, Pl.Lg. 683d; ὑποχειρίους ποιέεσθαί τινας make subject, bring into subjection, Hdt.1.106;

    ὑποχειρίας παρέξειν τὰς Ἀθήνας Id.5.91

    ;

    ὅταν δ' ὑποχείριος ἔλθῃ Thgn.363

    ; λαβεῖν τινα ὑποχείριον to get into one's power, E.Andr. 736, Lys.4.5, etc.;

    ὑ. ἔχειν τινάς Th. 3.11

    , etc.;

    τὰ ὑ. τέκνα POxy.1642.5

     (iii A. D.); ὑ. τὸν ἵππον ἔχειν keep him ' well in hand', X.Eq.8.12;

    τὴν χώραν ὑ. τοῖς πολεμίοις παραδόντα Lycurg.8

    , cf. X.Cyr.5.3.13; ὑ. τοῖς ἰητροῖς in the power of.., Hp.Medic.1; of wild birds, ὑ. ποιήσασθαι keep them in captivity, Pl.Tht. 197c; ὑ. τὰς ἐπιστήμας ἔχει ib. 198a.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑποχείριος

  • 12 ζάω

    ζάω contr. ζῶ (Hom.+) impf. ἔζων (Ro 7:9 B ἔζην; on this form s. Schwyzer I 675; B-D-F §88; Mlt-H. 194, both w. ref.); fut. ζήσω (uniformly attested Ro 6:2; Hb 12:9); the later (since Hippocr. VII p. 536 L.; LXX; AscIs 3:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 193 al.) form ζήσομαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356) is more common (on the fut. forms s. JLee, NovT 22, ’80, 289–98; GKilpatrick, ibid. 25, ’83, 146–51); 1 aor. ἔζησα. On the LXX usage s. Thackeray 269; for forms in pap, Gignac II 370.
    ① to be alive physically, live
    ⓐ of physical life in contrast to death
    α. gener. Ac 22:22; Ro 7:1, 2, 3; 14:8ac; 1 Cor 7:39; 2 Cor 5:15a; 6:9; Hb 9:17. ψυχὴ ζῶσα a living soul (Gen 1:20 al.; Just., D. 6, 1 ζῇ ψυχῇ) 1 Cor 15:45 (Gen 2:7); Rv 16:3 v.l. ὅσα ἔτη ζῇ as many years as he lives B 10:6 (cp. SIG 663, 6; Sb 173, 6 Αὐρήλιος ζήσας ἔτη νε´; En 10:10). τὸ ζῆν life (Attic wr., ins, pap, LXX) ὥστε ἐξαπορηθῆναι ἡμᾶς καὶ τοῦ ζῆν so that we even despaired of life 2 Cor 1:8. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν during the whole lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. Diod S 1, 74, 3 διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον; 4, 46, 4). ἔτι ζῶν while he was still living= before his death Mt 27:63 (CB I/2 660 no. 618 Ζώσιμος ἔτι ζῶν κατεσκεύασεν; 3 Km 12:6). ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν … εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός they were thrown alive into the lake of fire Rv 19:20. ζῶσα τέθνηκεν though alive she is dead 1 Ti 5:6 (cp. Sextus 7). ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες we during our (earthly) life 2 Cor 4:11; the same phrase= we who are still living 1 Th 4:15, 17. Here the opp. is νεκροί, as in Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38a. ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί the living and the dead Ac 10:42; Ro 14:9b; 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; 2 Cl 1:1; B 7:2.—Occasionally the contrast betw. νεκρός and ζῆν is used fig. with ref. to the realm of religion and ethics Lk 15:24 v.l., 32.
    β. of dead persons who return to life become alive again: of humans in general (3 Km 17:23) Mt 9:18; Ac 9:41; 20:12; Rv 20:4, 5; AcPl Ha 11, 7. Of Jesus Mk 16:11; Lk 24:5, 23; Ac 1:3; 25:19; Ro 14:9a; 2 Cor 13:4a; Rv 1:18b; 2:8 (Just., D. 69, 6 νεκροὺς … ζῆν ποιήσας).
    γ. of sick persons, if their illness terminates not in death but in recovery be well, recover (Artem. 4, 4 ἔζησεν ὁ παῖς=became well; 5, 71; 72; PGM 1, 188; 4 Km 1:2; 8:8 εἰ ζήσομαι ἐκ τῆς ἀρρωστίας μου ταύτης; Jos., Vi. 421) Mk 5:23; J 4:50, 51, 53.—Of removal of anxiety 1 Th 3:8.
    δ. also of healthy persons live on, remain alive (X., An. 3, 2, 39 ὅστις δὲ ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ πειράσθω νικᾶν; Ep. 56 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 359, 14]; ApcMos 31 διὰ τί σὺ ἀποθνῄσκεις καγὼ ζῶ;) Ac 25:24; 28:4. ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ ζήσομεν Js 4:15. ὸ̓ς ἔχει τὴν πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης καὶ ἔζησεν Rv 13:14.
    ε. of beings that in reality, or as they are portrayed, are not subject to death: of Melchizedek Hb 7:8 (opp. ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι). Jesus as everlasting high priest πάντοτε ζῶν 7:25.—In this sense it is most comprehensively applied to God (s. CBurchard, Untersuch. zu JosAs p. 103) (ὁ) θεὸς (ὁ) ζῶν (cp. 4 Km 19:4, 16; Is 37:4, 17; Hos 2:1; Da 6:21 Theod.; 3 Macc 6:28; TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 10 [Stone p. 46]; TestJob 37:2; JosAs 49:3 al.; SibOr 3, 763; POxy 924, 11 [IV A.D., Gnostic]; PGM 4, 1038 ὁ μέγας ζῶν θεός; 7, 823; 12, 79; Philo, Decal. 67 ὁ ζῶν ἀεὶ θεός; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 59, 18.—The phrase ‘the living God’ is not found in Joseph.) Mt 16:16; 26:63; J 6:69 v.l.; Ac 14:15; Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 3:3; 6:16; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Ti 3:15; 4:10; 6:17 v.l.; Hb 3:12; 9:14; 10:31; 12:22; Rv 1:18a; 4:10; 7:2; 10:6; 2 Cl 20:2; GJs 20:1; AcPl Ha 2, 32; also ὁ ζῶν πατήρ J 6:57. W. the addition εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων Rv 15:7; cp. 4:9 (cp. Tob 13:2; Sir 18:1). God takes a sovereign oath in the words ζῶ ἐγώ as surely as I live (Num 14:28 al.) Ro 14:11 (Is 49:18; classical parallels GStählin, NovT 5, ’62, 142 n. 2). ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός [μου] as surely as the Lord my God lives GJs 4:1; 6:1; 13:3; 15:3; 19:3 (Judg 8:19; 1 Km 25:34 al; GrBar 1:7; cp. ApcEsdr 2:7); in expanded form καὶ ζῇ ὁ Χριστὸς αὐτοῦ 15:4 (s. deStrycker ad loc.).—Christ lives διὰ τὸν πατέρα because of the Father J 6:57b (s. Bultmann, comm. ad loc.).
    ⓑ w. mention of that upon which life depends ἐπί τινι on the basis of someth. (Andoc. 1, 100; Isocr. 10, 18; Ael. Aristid. 28, 103 K.=49 p. 525 D.) ζ. ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3). ζ. ἔκ τινος obtain one’s living fr. someth. (Aristoph., Eccl. 591; Demosth. 57, 36; POxy 1117, 19; 1557, 12; TestJob 47:1f) 1 Cor 9:14.
    ⓒ w. more precise mention of the sphere (Artem. 3, 62 ἐν ἀγορᾷ ζ.=spend his life in the marketplace) ζ. ἐν σαρκί live in the flesh in contrast to the heavenly life Phil 1:22; Gal 2:20c; ζ. ἐν κόσμῳ live in the world Col 2:20. ζ. ἐν θεῷ, live in God (as the Being who penetrates and embraces everything) Ac 17:28 (s. κινέω 3). For AcPl Ha 1, 15 s. 2a end.
    ② to live in a transcendent sense, live, of the sanctified life of a child of God (ζῆν in the sense of a higher type of life than the animal: X., Mem. 3, 3, 11; Cass. Dio 69, 19: after years of public service, Similis retires and prepares this epitaph: Σίμιλις ἐνταύθα κεῖται βιοὺς μὲν ἔτη τόσα, ζήσας δὲ ἔτη ἑπτά=Here lies Similis, existing for so many years, but alive for only seven.).
    ⓐ in the world ἐγὼ ἔζων χωρὶς νόμου ποτέ I was once (truly) alive without law (this has been interpr. to mean when no law existed; Paul is then regarded as speaking fr. the viewpoint of humanity in paradise before the command Gen 2:16 f; 3:3. Another interpr. thinks of Paul as referring to the period in his life when he was not conscious of the existence and significance of the law. In view of Paul’s climactic affirmation in Ro 7:25, Paul probably illustrates in the first person the perils of a Christian who succumbs to the illusion that moral action is connected with law rather than with the ‘spirit of life in Christ’ Ro 8:2) Ro 7:9. Even now those who listen to the voice of the Son of God enjoy this life J 5:25; cp. 11:26; likew. those who receive him into their being ὁ τρώγων τὸν ἄρτον 6:57c; cp. Ro 6:11, 13 (ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας); Gal 2:19; Rv 3:1. This heavenly life on earth is a ζ. πνεύματι Gal 5:25 or a life not of mere human achievement, but of Christ who lives in Christians 2:20ab. Also of the superhuman power of the apostle ζήσομεν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς we shall live with him (Christ) through God’s power in our dealings with you 2 Cor 13:4. ὁ κύριος βούλεται ζῆν ἡμᾶς ἐν θεῷ=the Lord wills that we live under God’s direction AcPl Ha 1, 15 (opp. ἀποθανεῖν ἐν ἁμαρτίαις; s. 1c end)
    ⓑ in the glory of the life to come (Sir 48:11; cp. Dt 4:1; 8:1; 30:16).
    α. abs. Lk 10:28; J 11:25; 14:19; Ro 8:13b; Hb 12:9. ἐμοὶ τ. ζῆν Χριστός= life is possible for me only where Christ is (hence death is gain) Phil 1:21 (s. OSchmitz, GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 155–69). Another common interpr. is for me to live is Christ, i.e. while I am alive I experience real life in connection with Christ; w. death comes life in all fullness in the presence of Jesus.
    β. More specifically εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα have eternal life (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 17 ζῆν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα; PsSol 14:2) J 6:51, 58 (in J the blessed life which the follower of Jesus enjoys here and now in the body is simply continued in the heavenly life of the future. In other respects also the dividing line betw. the present and the future life is somet. nonexistent or at least not discernible); B 6:3; 8:5; 9:2; 11:10f; ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ (i.e. Χριστῷ) ζ. live together with Christ 1 Th 5:10; ζ. διʼ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Chr.) 1J 4:9; ζ. κατὰ θεὸν πνεύματι live, as God (lives), in the Spirit 1 Pt 4:6. ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται (cp. Hab 2:4) he that is just through faith will have life Ro 1:17 (AFeuillet, NTS 6, ’59, 52–80; but s. Fitzmyer, Ro [AB] ad loc.); Gal 3:11; Hb 10:38. This life is τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν ITr 9:2; IEph 11:1. Christ is called τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν our unshakable or inseparable life 3:2. τὸ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν our total life 1 Mg 1:2—The law-directed pers. believes concerning legal performance: ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς (Lev 18:5) Gal 3:12; cp. Ro 10:5 (cp. Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 1 οἱ τοῦτον [= τ. νόμον] φυλάττοντες ἔχονται τῆς σωτηρίας=those who observe law have a firm grip on security).
    ③ to conduct oneself in a pattern of behavior, live (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ used w. adverbs or other modifiers: adv. (Sallust. 19 p. 34, 25 κακῶς ζῆν [Just., A I, 4, 7]; SIG 889, 13ff; Wsd 14:28; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 198; Ath. 3, 1 δίκην θηρίων) ἀσώτως Lk 15:13. ἐθνικῶς and ἰουδαϊκῶς Gal 2:14. εὐσεβῶς 2 Ti 3:12. πανούργως Hm 3, 3. σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως κ. εὐσεβῶς Tit 2:12 (Plut., Mor. 1108c ζῆν σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως; cp. Diog. L. 10, 132; 140; Ar. 15, 10).—Φαρισαῖος live as a Pharisee Ac 26:5. ἐν πίστει Gal 2:20d. ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ Ro 6:2; ζ. ἐν τούτοις live in these (sins) Col 3:7. κατὰ ἀλήθειαν in keeping w. the truth IEph 6:2 (cp. Philo, Post. Cai. 73 κατὰ βούλημα τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ζ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 302 κατὰ τ. νόμους ζ.; Just., D. 47, 4 κατὰ τὸν νόμον; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 12, 7 κατὰ τὰς θείας γραφάς). κατὰ θεόν 8:1 (cp. SIG 910 A and B). κατὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν IPhld 3:2. κατὰ Χριστιανισμόν live in accordance w. (our) commitment to Christ IMg 10:1. κατὰ σάρκα Ro 8:12f; Dg 5:8; κατὰ κυριακὴν ζ. (opp. σαββατίζειν) include the observance of the Lord’s day in one’s life IMg 9:1. Of a married woman ζ. μετὰ ἀνδρός live w. her husband Lk 2:36 (for the added acc. of extent of time cp. Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 332 D.; Pr 28:16; ἥτις ἔζησεν καλῶς μετʼ ἐμοῦ ἔτη 28, μῆνας 4, ἡμέρας 5: SEG II, 384, 6–8 [restored]; s. also FDanker, Jesus and the New Age ’88, 71).
    ⓑ τινί live for someone or someth., for the other’s benefit (Hom. et al.; Demosth. 7, 17 οἳ οὐκ αἰσχύνονται Φιλίππῳ ζῶντες καὶ οὐ τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι; Dionys. Hal. 3, 17 … παῖδες, τῷ πατρὶ ζῶντες) ζ. τῷ θεῷ (4 Macc 7:19; 16:25; Philo, Mut. Nom. 13, Rer. Div. Her. 111; s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 10) Lk 20:38b (cp. Soph., Ajax 970); Ro 6:10, 11; Gal 2:19; Hm 3:5; AcPl Ha 10, 7; τῷ κυρίῳ Ro 14:8b (cp. Plut., Cleom. 819 [31, 5]). For Christ 2 Cor 5:15; τῷ ἐμῷ βασιλεῖ AcPl Ha 9, 26 (restored after Aa I 112, 14) τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζ. 1 Pt 2:24; ἑαυτῷ ζ. live for oneself (Menand., Fgm. 646 Kö. οὐχ ἑαυτῷ ζῆν μόνον; Diod S 10, 33, 2 ζ. ἑαυτοῖς=live for themselves) Ro 14:7.
    ④ to be full of vitality, be lively the ptc. is used fig. w. respect to things (cp. τῶν δένδρων τῶν ζῶντων ParJer 9:3), of spring water in contrast w. cistern water ὕδωρ ζῶν (Gen 26:19; Lev 14:5; Jer 2:13 v.l.; Zech 14:8.—Stagnant water is called ὕ. νεκρόν: Synes., Ep. 114, 254d) J 4:10f (Hdb. exc. on J 4:14); 7:38; D 7:1f (Wengst p. 77 n. 57). ζώσας πηγάς Rv 7:17 v.l.
    ⑤ to be life-productive, offer life ptc. used w. respect to things (SIG 1173 [138 A.D.], 5 ζῶσαι ἀρεταὶ ἐγένοντο=miracles full of divine life occurred) λόγια ζῶντα words that meant life Ac 7:38. λόγος ζῶν θεοῦ 1 Pt 1:23; cp. Hb 4:12. ὁδὸς ζῶσα a living way 10:20. ἐλπὶς ζῶσα a living hope 1 Pt 1:3.—ζ. is also used of things which serve as descriptions of pers. who communicate divine life: of Christ ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν J 6:51a. λίθος ζῶν 1 Pt 2:4. Of Christians: θυσία ζῶσα a living sacrifice Ro 12:1. λίθοι ζῶντες 1 Pt 2:5.—τὰ παρὰ ζώσης φωνῆς καὶ μενούσης the (words) of a living and abiding voice Papias (2:4) (opp. ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων).—Lit. s. ζωή end. DELG s.v. ζώω.M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζάω

  • 13 μή

    μή, Elean [full] μά [pron. full] [ᾱ] SIG9.5 (Olympia, vi B.C.). (Cf. Skt.
    A mā´, Arm. mi [from I.-E. mē´], negative used in prohibitions):— not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)
    A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,
    1 with [tense] pres. imper., 2 pers.,

    μή μ' ἐρέθιζε Il.1.32

    , al.; 3 pers.,

    μή μευ πειράτω 9.345

    , etc.: rarely with [tense] aor. imper.,

    μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ 4.410

    , cf. Od.24.248; in [dialect] Att.,

    μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος Ar.Th. 870

    ; 3 pers.,

    μή τις ἀκουσάτω Od.16.301

    , cf. Pi.O.8.55, P.5.23, A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 1180;

    μηδεὶς νομισάτω, προσδοκησάτω X.Cyr.7.5.73

    , Pl.Ap. 17c: with [tense] pf. imper. 3 pers.,

    μή τις ὀπίσσω τετράφθω Il.12.272

    ; or 2 pers. when [tense] pf. = [tense] pres.,

    μὴ κεκράγετε Ar. V. 415

    .
    2 with subj. (usu. 2 pers. of [tense] aor.), in prohibitions,

    μὴ δή με.. ἐάσῃς Il.5.684

    , cf. A.Pr. 583 (lyr.), al.; μή τοί με κρύψῃς τοῦτο ib. 625, cf. S.Ph. 470;

    μὴ φθονήσῃς Pl.Prt. 320c

    : coupled with [tense] pres. imper.,

    μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά, μὴ εὐορκεῖτε D.21.211

    ; 3 pers.,

    μὴ.. γένηται Il.4.37

    , cf. Od.22.213;

    μὴ ματεύσῃ θεὸς γενέσθαι Pi.O.5.24

    : rarely, if ever, with 2 pers. [tense] pres. subj.,

    μὴ κάμνῃς E.IA 1143

     (leg. κάμῃς); 3 pers., μή τις οἴηται, = μὴ οἰώμεθα, Pl.Lg. 861e: also with the hortative subj. used to supply the 1 pers. of the imper., [tense] pres. μὴ ἴομεν ([etym.] ἴωμεν) Il.12.216, etc.;

    μὴ διώκωμεν Hdt.8.109

    , etc.: [tense] aor.

    μὴ πάθωμεν X.Cyr.1.5.11

    , etc.: rarely with [ per.] 1sg.,

    μή σε.. κιχείω Il.1.26

    , cf. 21.475, 22.123, S.OC 174 (anap.).
    b with [tense] pres. or [tense] aor. subj. in a warning or statement of fear, μὴ.. γένησθε take care you do not become, Il.5.487; μὴ.. ὑφαίνῃσιν I fear.. may prove to be weaving, Od.5.356;

    αἷμα μὴ σοῖς ἐξομόρξωμαι πέπλοις E.HF 1399

    : in [dialect] Att. Prose, to make a polite suggestion of apprehension or hesitation, perhaps,

    μὴ ἀγροικότερον ᾖ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν Pl.Grg. 462e

    , cf. Tht. 188d, Arist.Pol. 1291a8, al.: in later Greek the ind. is found,

    μὴ ἡ ἔννοια ἡμῶν.. ἀντιλαμβάνεται Dam.Pr.27

    .
    3 with [tense] fut. ind., a dub. usage ( νεμεσήσετ ' is subj. in Il.15.115),

    μηδεμίαν ἄδειαν δώσετε Lys.29.13

    ; μὴ βουλήσεσθε (Pap. βούλη[σθ]ε) D.23.117; cf.

    μαλακὸν ἐνδώσετε μηδέν Ar.Pl. 488

    .
    4 with past tenses of ind. to express an unfulfilled wish,

    μὴ ὄφελες λίσσεσθαι Il.9.698

    , cf. Od. 11.548;

    μή ποτ' ὤφελον λιπεῖν τὴν Σκῦρον S.Ph. 969

    ;

    εἴθε μή ποτ' εἰδόμαν Id.OT 1217

     (lyr.), cf. E.IA70, Cyc. 186, X.Cyr.4.6.3.
    5 with opt. to express a negative wish, with [tense] pres.,

    ἃ μὴ κραίνοι τύχη A.Th. 426

    , cf. Eu. 938 (lyr.): more freq. with [tense] aor.,

    μὴ σέ γ' ἐν ἀμφιάλῳ Ἰθάκῃ βασιλῆα Κρονίων ποιήσειεν Od.1.386

    , cf. 403, 11.613.
    6 in oaths and asseverations,

    ἴστω Ζεὺς.., μὴ μὲν τοῖς ἵπποισιν ἀνὴρ ἐποχήσεται ἄλλος Il.10.330

    ;

    ἴστω νῦν τόδε Γαῖα.., μὴ.. Ποσειδάων.. πημαίνει Τρῶας 15.41

    ;

    μὰ τὴν Ἀφροδίτην.., μὴ ἐγώ σ' ἀφήσω Ar.Ec. 1000

    , cf. Av. 195, Lys. 917.
    8 freq. without a Verb, εἰ χρή, θανοῦμαι. Answ. μὴ σύ γε (sc. θάνῃς) S.OC 1441; ἄπελθε νῦν. Answ. μὴ (sc. γενέσθω) ἀλλά nay but, Ar.Ach. 458; in curt expressions, μὴ τριβὰς ἔτι (sc. ποιεῖσθε) S.Ant. 577; μή μοι σύ none of that to me! E.Med. 964; μή μοι πρόφασιν no excuses! Ar.Ach. 345;

    μή μοί γε μύθους Id.V. 1179

    .
    B in DEPENDENT clauses:
    1 with Final Conjs.,

    ἵνα μή Il.19.348

    , etc.;

    ὅπως μή D.27.5

    ,al.;

    ὡς μή Il.8.37

    , A.Pr.53,al.;

    ὄφρα μή Il. 1.118

    ,al.: with ὅπως ἄν and ὡς ἄν, that so,

    ὅπως ἂν.. μηδέ Ar.V. 178

    , Pl.Grg. 481a;

    ὡς ἂν μή Od.4.749

    , Hdt.1.5; but
    b μή alone, = ἵνα μή, lest,

    ἀπόστιχε μή τινοήσῃ Ἥρη Il.1.522

    , cf. 587;

    λίσσεσθαι.., μή οἱ.. χολώσαιτο φρένα κούρη Od.6.147

    : [tense] fut. ind. and [tense] aor. subj. in consecutive clauses, Ar.Ec. 495 (lyr., dub.l.).
    2 in the protasis of conditional sentences, v. εἰ (for the exceptions v. οὐ), and with temporal conjunctions used conditionally, v. ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, ὅτε, etc.
    3 in later Gr., with causal Conjs.,

    ὁ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν Ev.Jo.3.18

    , cf. Luc.DMort.21.2, D Deor.2.1;

    ἐπεὶ μή Id.Hist.Conscr.3

    , etc.: also after ὅτι and ὡς that,

    ὅτι μὴ ἐστὶν ἐπίπεδος οὕτως ἂν καταμάθοιμεν Cleom.1.8

    , cf. Luc.Hist.Conscr.29, DDeor.20.10.
    5 c. inf.,
    a regularlyfrom Homer on, exc. after Verbs of saying and thinking (but v. infr. c): after ὥστε or

    ὡς, ὥστε μὴ φρονεῖν A.Pers. 725

     (troch.), etc. (for exceptions v. οὐ): always when the inf. takes the Art.,

    τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν Pi.O.8.60

    ;

    τὸ μὴ ἀμελεῖν μάθε A. Eu.86

    , cf. 749, Pr. 624;

    λείπομαι ἐν τῷ μὴ δύνασθαι S.OC 496

    .
    b by an apparent pleonasm after Verbs of negative result signifying to forbid, deny, and the like ,

    ὁ δ' ἀναίνετο μηδὲν ἑλέσθαι Il.18.500

     (without μή ib. 450);

    ἀντιδικεῖν Lys.6.12

     ([etym.] μηδέν)

    ; ἀντιλέγειν Th.5.49

    , Is.4.15 ([etym.] μηδέ)

    ; ἀπαγορεύειν Antipho 5.34

    , And.4.9;

    ἀπειπεῖν Ar.Av. 557

    , D.33.19, etc.;

    ἀπαυδᾶν Ar.Eq. 1072

    ;

    ἀπείργειν E.Hel. 1559

    , al. (without

    μή S.Aj.70

    );

    ἀπιστεῖν Th.4.40

    ;

    ἀπεγνωκέναι Lys.1.34

    ;

    ἀποστερεῖσθαι Antipho 2.4.1

     ([etym.] μηδέ)

    ; ἀποτρέπεσθαι Id.5.32

     ([etym.] μηδέν) ; ἀρνεῖσθαι, ἔξαρνος εἶναι, Ar.Eq. 572, Hdt.3.67;

    ἐναντιωθῆναι Pl.Ap. 32b

    ;

    σχεῖν Hdt.1.158

    ; παύειν (where the part. is more freq.) Ar.Ach. 634;

    κωλῦσαι E.Ph. 1269

    ;

    ἐπάρατον ἦν μὴ οἰκεῖν Th.2.17

    : in these cases the Art. freq. precedes

    μή, τὸ δὲ μὴ λεηλατῆσαι.. ἔσχε τόδε Hdt.5.101

    ; ἐξομῇ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι; S.Ant. 535; εἴργειν τὸ μή .. Th.3.1, etc.; also

    ἀπέφυγε τὰ σφῷν τὸ μὴ πίτνειν κακῶς S.OC 1740

     (lyr.): with Art. in gen., ἔχειν τοῦ μή .. X.An.3.5.71; ἐμποδὼν γίγνεσθαι τοῦ μή .. Id.Cyr.2.4.23.
    c after Verbs of saying and thinking which involve an action of will, as in those signifying to swear, aver, believe, and the like ; so after ὄμνυμι, Il.9.133, Od.5.179, Hdt.1.165, 2.179, Ar.V. 1047, etc.;

    μαρτυρῶ Lys.7.11

    , D.45.15, etc.;

    ὁμολογῶ Pl.Prt. 336b

    , Smp. 202b, cf. Phd. 93d, etc.;

    ἐγγυῶμαι Pi.O.11(10).18

    , Pl.Prt. 336d;

    πέπεισμαι Id.Ap. 37a

    , etc.;

    πιστεύω And.1.2

    , X.An.1.9.8, etc.: occasionally with other Verbs,

    φημί Id.Mem.1.2.39

    , Pl.Tht. 155a; λέγω, προλέγω, Th. 5.49, 1.139; πάντες ἐροῦσι μή .. X. Cyr.7.1.18; νομίζω ib.7.5.59, Th.6.102;

    ἡγοῦμαι Pl.Ap. 27d

    : very freq. in later Gr., Ev.Matt.2.12, Luc. Peregr.44, etc.
    6 with the part., when it can be resolved into a conditional clause, μὴ ἐνείκας, = εἰ μὴ ἤνεικε, Hdt.4.64; μὴ θέλων, = εἰ μὴ θέλεις, A.Pr. 504; μὴ δολώσαντος θεοῦ, = εἰ μὴ ἐδόλωσε, Id.Ag. 273; μὴ δρῶν, = εἰ μὴ δρῴην, S.OT77, etc.: in a general or characteristic sense, δίδασκέ με ὡς μὴ εἰδότα, = ut qui nihil sciam, Id.OC 1155, cf. Ant. 1063, 1064; τίς πρὸς ἀνδρὸς μὴ βλέποντος ἄρκεσις; one who sees not, Id.OC73: in this signf. freq. with the Art.,

    ὁ μὴ λεύσσων Id.Tr. 828

     (lyr.);

    ὁ μὴ δουλεύσας Pl.Lg. 762e

    ;

    τῷ μὴ εἰργασμένῳ Antipho 5.65

    ;

    τὸν.. μὴ φροντίσαντα Lycurg.27

    , cf. 45, etc.: with causal significance,

    μὴ παρὼν θαυμάζεται S.OT 289

    , etc.;

    ἄθλια πάσχω μὴ.. μόνον βιαζόμενος Antipho 2.2.4

    ;

    ἑτέρας μηδεμιᾶς ὁμολογουμένης εἶναι Is.5.16

    ;

    μηδενὸς ἐμποδὼν ὄντος D.3.8

    : very freq. in later Greek, POxy.38.16 (i A.D.), Luc.DMeretr.12.4, etc.: occasionally after Verbs of knowing and showing, S.Ph.79, OC 656, 797, 1122, E.Tr. 970, Th.1.76, 2.17.
    7 with Substs., Adjs., and Advbs. used generically, with or without Art.,

    τὰ μὴ δίκαια A.Eu. 432

    ;

    δίκαια καὶ μὴ δίκαια Id.Ch.78

     (lyr.);

    τὸ μὴ 'νδικον S.OT 682

     (lyr.);

    τὸ μὴ καλόν Id.Ant. 370

     (lyr.); ἡ μὴ 'μπειρία, = τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ἐμπειρίαν, want of experience, Ar.Ec. 115;

    ἡ μὴ ἐπιτροπή Pl.Lg. 966c

    ; δῆμον καὶ μὴ δῆμον ib. 759b;

    ὁ μὴ ἰατρός Id.Grg. 459b

    ;

    νίκης μὴ κακῆς A.Eu. 903

    , cf. Th. 411;

    τῷ φρονοῦντι μὴ καλῶς Id.Pr. 1012

    , cf. Ag. 349, 927.
    a when the thing feared is [tense] fut., mostly with subj.: with [tense] pres. subj., δεινῶς ἀθυμῶ μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ shall proveto be.., S.OT 747, cf.Ant. 1113;

    ὅρα μὴ κυβεύῃς Pl.Prt. 314a

    : more freq. with [tense] aor.,

    δείδοικα.. μή σε παρείπῃ Il. 1.555

    , cf. 9.244, 13.745: with [tense] pf., shall prove to have been,

    δέδοικα μὴ περαιτέρω πεπραγμέν' ᾖ μοι S. Tr. 663

    , cf. Ph. 494, Hdt.3.119,4.140, etc.: less freq. with [tense] fut. ind., X.Cyr.2.3.6, Ar.Ec. 488, Pl.Phlb. 13a: with opt. according to the sequence of moods and tenses: [tense] pres. opt., S. Tr. 482, X.An.1.10.9: [tense] aor., Od.11.634, etc.: [tense] pf., X.Cyr.1.3.10: with [tense] fut. opt. in oratio obliqua, Id.HG6.4.27, Mem.1.2.7, Pl.Euthphr. 15d: with opt. and ἄν, S.Tr. 631, X.vect.4.41.
    c with ind. and subj. in consecutive clauses, E.Ph.93.
    C in QUESTIONS:
    I direct questions,
    1 with ind., where aneg. answer is anticipated (but more generally in A.Ag. 683 (lyr.), S.OC 1502, Tr. 316, Pl.Grg. 488b), in Hom. only ἦ μή .. ; Od.6.200, 9.405; μή σοι δοκοῦμεν .. ; A.Pers. 344, cf. Pr. 249, 959, etc.: in Trag. and [dialect] Att. freq. ἆρα μή; Id.Th. 208, S.El. 446, Pl.R. 405a: for questions in which μή ([etym.] μηδέ ) follows οὐ, v. οὐ μή.
    b in other questions, τί μὴ ποιήσω; what am I not to do? S.El. 1276 (lyr.); τί μή; why not? Id.Aj. 668 (s.v.l.); cf. μήν
    2 with subj., when the speaker deliberates about a neg. action, μὴ οὕτω φῶμεν; Pl.R. 335c, cf. 337b, 417b; ὁ τοιοῦτος μὴ δῷ δίκην; D.21.35; πῶς μὴ φῶμεν; Pl.Tht. 161e: with opt. and ἄν, πῶς ἄν τις μὴ θυμῷ λέγοι; how can a man help being excited when he speaks? Id.Lg. 887c, cf. Grg. 510d, X. Mem.3.1.10.
    II indirect questions, freq. with Verbs implying fear and apprehension (cf. B. 8),

    ὄφρα ἴδωμεν μὴ τοὶ κοιμήσωνται Il.10.98

    , cf. 101, Od.21.395;

    περισκοπῶ μή πού τις.. ἐγχρίμπτει S.El. 898

    , cf. Th.2.13, etc.; also σκοπεῖσθαι πῶς ἂν μή .. Isoc.5.8, cf. 15.6; later in simple indirect questions,

    ἐπυνθάνετο μὴ ἔγνω Ant.Lib.23.5

    .
    2 in questions introduced by

    εἰ, ἤρετό με.. εἰ μὴ μέμνημαι Aeschin.2.36

     ( εἰ οὐκ in same sense, 1.84): in the second part of a disjunctive question, εἰ.. ἢ (or εἴτε) μή.., εἴτε.. εἴτε μή .., A.Eu. 468, 612, And.1.7, Pl.Ap. 18a, R. 457d, X.Cyr.2.1.7; εἴτε.. εἴτε μή.., εἰ.. ἢ οὔ, εἰ.. ἢ μή without difference of meaning between μή and οὐ, Is.8.9; so also,

    τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή,.. τοὺς λόγους, εἰ ὀρθῶς διδάσκουσι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἢ οὔ Antipho 5.14

    .
    D POSITION of μή. When the neg. extends its power over the whole clause, μή prop. precedes the Verb. When its force is limited to single words, it precedes those words. But Poets sts. put μή after the Verb,

    ὄλοιο μή πω S.Ph. 961

    ; φράσῃς.. μὴ πέρα ib. 332, cf. OC 1522.
    2 μή is sts. repeated,

    μή, μή καλέσῃς Ar.V. 1418

    , cf. S. Aj. 190, OC 210 (both lyr.).
    E PROSODY: in Trag. μή may be joined by synizesis with a following ει or ου, μὴ οὐ, μὴ εἰδέναι, S.OT13, 221, Tr. 321, etc.: initial ε after μή is cut off by aphaeresis,

    μὴ 'πὁθουν Id.Aj. 962

    ;

    μὴ 'μβαίνῃς Id.OC 400

    ;

    μὴ 'γώ Id.Ph. 910

    : in Prose,

    μὴ 'κ IG12.115.11

    : μή folld. by α is sts. written μἀ .. (v. μὴ ἀλλά, etc.); sts. separately,

    μὴ ἀδικεῖν A.Eu.85

    , etc.
    F μή in COMPOSITION, or joined with other Particles, as μὴ ἀλλά, μὴ γάρ, μὴ οὐ, μὴ ὅπως or ὅτι, μή ποτε, etc., will be found in alphabetical order.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > μή

  • 14 σκῆπτρον

    σκῆπτρον, τό: [dialect] Dor. [full] σκᾶπτον (Pi.O.7.28, P.1.6, etc.), later [full] σκᾶπτρον (AP7.428 (Mel.)), but σκῆπτρον in lyr. passages of Trag., as S.Ph. 140: ([etym.] σκήπτω):—
    A staff or stick, used by the lame or aged, Il.18.416, Od.13.437, 14.31, 17.199, 18.103;

    ἰσχὺν.. νέμοντες ἐπὶ σκήπτροις A.Ag.75

    ; σκήπτρῳ προδεικνύς, of a blind man feeling his way, S.OT 456;

    πρεσβῦται.. σκήπτροισιν ἄκασκα προβῶντες Cratin.126

    : metaph. of the daughters of Oedipus, ὦ σκῆπτρα φωτός his staffs or supports, S.OC 1109, cf. 848:—the Prose word is βακτηρία.
    II staff or baton, esp. as the badge of command, sceptre: in Hom. borne by kings and chiefs, and transmitted from father to son (whence Il.2.101 sqq. is called ἡ τοῦ σκήπτρου παράδοσις, Th.1.9), Il.9.156, Od. 11.569: also borne by heralds, Il.7.277, al.; by speakers, who on rising to speak received it from the herald, 1.234, 18.505, 23.568, Od.2.37; by priests and soothsayers, Il.1.15, A.Ag. 1265; later by minstrels, first in Hes. Th.30;

    σ. χρύσεον Il.1.15

    , 2.268, Od.11.91, 569; wrought by Hephaestus, Il.2.101;

    χρυσείοις ἥλοισι πεπαρμένον 1.245

    . In oaths or protests it was held up, the gods being called to witness, ib. 234, 7.412, 10.321, 328;

    ὁ δ' ὅρκος ἦν τοῦ σ. ἐπανάτασις Arist.Pol. 1285b12

    ; used as a stick or cudgel to punish the refractory, Il.2.199, 265, Pi.O.7.28, S.OT 811.
    2 as a symbol of royalty, kingly power, etc., Il.6.159, 9.38; τοι Ζεὺς ἐγγυάλιξε σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας ib.99, cf. 156, 298, A.Pr. 172 (anap.); τὸ θεῖον Διὸς ς. S.Ph. 140 (lyr.): freq. in pl. in this sense, Hdt.7.52; τύραννα ς. A.Pr. 761, cf. Eu. 626;

    ὃς.. σκῆπτρα καὶ θρόνους ἔχει S.OC 425

    , cf. 449, etc.;

    σκῆπτρα χώρας E.HF 1167

    .
    III = Hebr. Shevet, of the tribes ([etym.] φυλαί) of Israel, LXX3 Ki.11.13,al.(but in 1 Ki.10.20 sq., φυλή is a sub-division of σκῆπτρον).
    IV = λυχνὶς στεφανωματική, Ps.Dsc. 3.100.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σκῆπτρον

  • 15 ἀπό

    ἀπό, [dialect] Aeol., Thess., Arc., Cypr. [full] ἀπύ Sapph.44, cf. 78, Alc.33, Theoc.28.16,IG12(2).6.45 (Mytil.), ἀπυδόμεναι ib.9(2).594 ([place name] Larissa), 5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea), etc.:—Prep. usually with Gen. but v. infr. B. (Cf. Skt.
    A ápa, Lat. ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Goth. af, OE. af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ ᾰπο?ἀπόX: where ἀπο ¯ is found in [dialect] Ep. before v or liquids (as

    ἀπὸ ἕθεν Il.6.62

    ,

    ἀπὸ νευρῆς 11.664

    , Hes. Sc. 409) ἀπαί was sometimes written in later texts, cf. Eust. 625.11:— [pron. full] ᾱ metri gr. in [dialect] Ep. compds., such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]
    I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in Hom. the prevailing sense:
    1 of Motion, from, away from,

    ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων Il.2.208

    ; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν ib.24.492;

    ἀπ' οὐρανόθεν 8.365

     (later with Advbs.,

    ἀπὸ ἔμπροσθεν LXX Ec.1.10

    , etc.); strengthd.,

    ἐκτὸς ἀ. κλισιης Il.10.151

    ; also ἀπ' αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, ib.24.725; opp. ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion,

    λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ' ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν X.Mem.2.7.2

    ; similarly of the cause or ground,

    ἐξ ὧν προηγώνισθε καὶ ἀφ' ὧν εἰκάζω Th.4.126

    :— freq. of warriors fighting from chariots, etc.,

    οἱ μὲν ἀφ' ἵππων, οἱ δ' ἀ. νηῶν.. μάχοντο Il.15.386

    ;

    ἀφ' ἵππων μάρνασθαι Od.9.49

    ; so

    ἡ μάχη ἦν ἀφ' ἵππων Hdt.1.79

    ; λαμπὰς ἔσται ἀφ' ἵππων on horseback, Pl.R. 328a;

    ἀφ' ἵππου θηρεύειν X.An.1.2.7

    ;

    ἀ. νεῶν πεζομαχεῖν Th. 7.62

    ;

    ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν αἰρόμενος τοὺς ἱστοὺς ἀ. τούτων ἐσκοπεῖτο X.HG 6.2.29

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο.. κατέσταζον γένυν, of tears, E.Hec. 240: joined with

    ἐκ, ἐκ Κορίνθου ἀ. τοῦ στρατοπέδου Pl.Tht. 142a

    .
    2 of Position, away from, far from,

    μένων ἀ. ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.2.292

     (cf. ἀπ' ἀνδρὸς εἶναι to live apart from a man or husband, Plu.CG4);

    κεκρυμμένος ἀπ' ἄλλων Od.23.110

    ;

    μοῦνος ἀπ' ἄλλων h.Merc. 193

    ; ἀπ' ὀφθαλμῶν, ἀπ' οὔατος, far from sight or hearing, Il.23.53, 18.272, cf. 22.454;

    ἀ. θαλάσσης ᾠκίσθησαν Th.1.7

    , cf. 46;

    αὐλίζεσθαι ἀ. τῶν ὅπλων Id.6.64

    ;

    ἀπ' οἴκου εἶναι Id.1.99

    ; σπεύδειν ἀ. ῥυτῆρος far from, i.e. without using the rein, S.OC 900; in Hom. freq. strengthd., τῆλε ἀ..., νόσφιν ἀ..., Il.23.880, 5.322; in measurement of distances,

    ὅσον ιέ στάδια ἀ. Φυλῆς X.HG2.4.4

    , etc.; but later the numeral follows

    ἀ., πηγὰς ἔχων ἀ. μ σταδίων τῆς θαλάσσης D.S.4.56

    ;

    ἀ. σταδίων κ τῆς πόλεως Plu.Phil.4

    ; κατεστρατοπέδευσεν ἀ. ν σταδίων fifty stades away, Id.Oth.11, cf. D.Chr.17.17.
    3 of the mind, ἀ. θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.1.562;

    ἀ. δόξης 10.324

    ;

    οὐ.. ἀ. σκοποῦ οὐδ' ἀ. δόξης Od.11.344

    ;

    ἀ. τοῦ ἀνθρωπείου τρόπου Th.1.76

    ; οὐδὲν ἀ. τρόπου not without reason, Pl.R. 470b; οὐκ ἀ. σκοποῦ, καιροῦ, Id.Tht. 179c, 187e;

    οὐκ ἀ. γνώμης S. Tr. 389

    ;

    οὐκ ἀ. τοῦ πράγματος D.24.6

    ;

    μάλα πολλὸν ἀπ' ἐλπίδος ἔπλετο A.R.2.863

    .
    4 in pregnant sense, with Verbs of rest, previous motion being implied (cf. ἐκ)

    , ἀνὰ δ' ἐβόασεν.. ἀ. πέτρας σταθείς E.Tr. 523

    ; ἀ.τῆς ἐμῆς κεφαλῆς τὴν [ἐκείνου] κεφαλὴν ἀναδήσω, i. e. taking the chaplet off my head, and placing it on his, Pl.Smp. 212e: with Verbs of hanging, where ἐκ is more common,

    ἁψαμένη βρόχον ἀ. μελάθρου Od.11.278

    .
    5 with the Article, where the sense of motion often disappears, οἱ ἀ. τῶν οἰκιῶν φεύγουσιν, i.e. οἱ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις φεύγουσιν ἀπ' αὐτῶν, X.Cyr.7.5.23; οἱ ἀ. τῶν πύργων.. ἐπαρήξουσι ib.6.4.18;

    αἴρειν τὰ ἀ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Cra. 410b

    ; αἱ ἵπποι αἱ ἀ. τοῦ ἅρματος v.l. in Hdt.4.8;

    ὁ Ἀθηναῖος ὁ ἀ. τοῦ στρατεύματος X.An.7.2.19

    ;

    τὸν ἀ. γραμμᾶς κινεῖ λίθον Theoc.6.18

    .
    6 partitive, λαχὼν ἀ. ληΐδος αἶσαν part taken from the booty, a share of it, Od.5.40;

    αἴρεσθαι ἀ. τῶν καλπίδων Ar. Lys. 539

    ;

    ἀ. ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἷς μοῦνος Hdt.6.27

    ;

    ὀλίγοι ἀ. πολλῶν Th.7.87

    , cf. A.Pers. 1023.
    7 Math., of figures described upon a base,

    κῶνον ἀναγράφειν ἀ. κύκλου Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.19

    , etc.; τὸ ἀ. τῆς AB τετράγωνον the square on AB, Euc.1.47, cf. 48; εἴδεα ἀ. .. Archim.Spir.10,11.
    8 ἀ. ἀνθρώπου ἕως γυναικός man and woman, LXX1 Es.9.40; ἀ. ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦib.Nu.5.3.
    9 from being, instead of,

    ἀθανάταν ἀ. θνατᾶς.. ἐποίησας Βερενίκαν Theoc.15.106

    .
    10 privative, free from, without,

    ἀ. πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας PLips.16.19

     (ii A. D.);

    ἀ. ζημίας PTeb420.4

     (iii A. D.).
    II OF TIME, from, after, Hom. only in Il.8.54 ἀ. δείπνου θωρήσσοντο rising up from, i.e. after, cf. Hdt.1.133; ἀ. δείπνου εἶναι or γενέσθαι, Id.1.126, 2.78, 5.18, al.;

    ἀ. τοῦ σιτίου πίνειν Hp.Salubr.5

    ;

    ἀ. τῶν σίτων διαπονεῖσθαι X.Lac. 5.8

    ; in narrative, τὸ ἀ. τούτου or το̄δε, from this point onwards, Hdt.1.4,2.99;

    ἀ. τούτου τοῦ χρόνου Id.1.82

    , X.An.7.5.8;

    τὸ ἀπ' ἐκείνου Luc.Tox.25

    ;

    ἡμέρῃ δεκάτῃ ἀφ' ἧς.. Hdt.3.14

    , etc.;

    δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ ἀ. τῆς ἐμπρήσιος Id.8.55

    , cf. X.An.1.7.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗ χρόνου Id.Cyr. 1.2.13

    ; more often ἀπ' or ἀφ' οὗ, Hdt.2.44, Th.1.18, etc.;

    ἀφ' οὗπερ A.Pers. 177

    ;

    ἀφ' ἧς Plu.Pel.15

    ; εὐθὺς ἀ. παλαιοῦ, ἀ. τοῦ πάνυ ἀρχαίου, of olden time, Th.1.2,2.15;

    ἀπ' ἀρχᾶς Pi.P.8.25

    , etc.;

    ἀ. γενεᾶς X. Cyr.1.2.8

    ; ἀφ' ἑσπέρας from the beginning of evening, i.e. at eventide, Th.7.29; ἀ. πρώτου ὕπνου ib.43;

    ἀ. μέσων νυκτῶν Ar.V. 218

    ; ἀπ' ἀγροῦ fresh from field-work, Ev.Marc.15.21, cf. 7.4;

    ἀ. νουμηνίας X.An.5.6.23

    ; χρονίζειν ἀ. τοῦ καιροῦ tarry beyond the time, LXX2 Ki. 20.5; ἀ. τέλους ἐννέα μηνῶν at the end of.., ib.24.8;

    γενόμενος ἀ. τῆς ἀρχῆς Plu.Caes.5

    : hence ἀ. ἀγωνοθετῶν an εχ-ἀγωνοθέτης, IG3.398;

    ἀ. λογιστῶν POxy.1103.3

     (iv A. D.); οἱ ἀ. ὑπατείας, = consulares, Hdn.7.1.9, etc.; but ἀ. τινος the freedman of.., IG5(2).50.59(Tegea, ii A. D.), cf.ib.5(1).1391 ([place name] Andania), 1473.
    III OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:
    1 of that from which one is born, οὐ γὰρ ἀ. δρυός ἐσσι οὐδ' ἀ. πέτρης not sprung from oak or rock, Od.19.163;

    γίγνονται δ' ἄρα ταί γ' ἔκ τε κρηνέων ἀ. τ' ἀλσέων 10.350

    , cf. S.OT 415, OC 571, etc.: sts. ἀπό denotes remote, and ἐκ immediate, descent,

    τοὺς μὲν ἀ. θεῶν, τοὺς δ' ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν θεῶν γεγονότας Isoc.12.81

    , cf. Hdt.7.150;

    πέμπτη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ γέννα A.Pr. 853

    ; τρίτος ἀ. Διός third in descent from Zeus, Pl.R. 391c; οἱ ἀ. γένους τινός his descendants, Plu. Them.32;

    Περσέως ἀφ' αἵματος E.Alc. 509

    : of the place one springs from,

    ἵπποι.. ποταμοῦ ἄπο Σελλήεντος Il.2.839

    . cf. 849;

    Ἡρακλεῖδαι οἱ ἀ. Σπάρτης Hdt.8.114

    , cf. Th.1.89, etc.;

    τοὺς ἀ. Φρυγίας X.Cyr.2.1.5

    , etc.:hence,
    b metaph. of things,

    Χαρίτων ἄπο κάλλος ἔχουσαι Od.6.18

    ; θεῶν ἄπο μήδεα εἰδώς ib.12;

    γάλα ἀ. βοός A.Pers. 611

    ;

    μῆνις ἀφ' ἡμῶν Id.Eu. 314

    ;

    ἡ ἀφ' ὑμῶν τιμωρία Th.1.69

    ; ὁ ἀ. τῶν πολεμίων φόβος fear inspired by the enemy, X.Cyr.3.3.53.
    c of persons, οἱ ἀ. τῆς χώρας, τῆς πόλεως, country folk, townsfolk, Plb.2.6.8, 5.70.8; and so of connexion with the founder or leader of a sect,

    οἱ ἀ. Πυθαγόρου Luc.Herm.14

    ;

    οἱ ἀ. Πλάτωνος Plu.Brut.2

    ; οἱ ἀ. τοῦ περιπάτου, ἀ. τῆς Στοᾶς, etc., Luc.Cont. 6; generally οἱ ἀ. φιλοσοφίας καὶ λόγων philosophers and learned men, ibid.; οἱ ἀ. σκηνῆς καὶ θεάτρου stage players, Plu.Sull.2;

    οἱ ἀ. τῆς βουλῆς Id.Caes.10

    , etc.; ὁ ἀφ' ἑστίας παῖς, v. ἑστία; ἀπ' ἐξωμίδος with only an ἐξωμίς, S.E.P.1.153.
    2 of the material from or of which a thing is made,

    εἵματα ἀ. ξύλου πεποιημένα Hdt.7.65

    ;

    ἀπ' ὄμφακος τεύχειν οἶνον A.Ag. 970

    , cf. S.Tr. 704;

    ὅσσα ἀ. γλυκερῶ μέλιτος Theoc.15.117

    ;

    ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου Ev.Matt.3.4

    : hence στέφανος ἀ. ταλάντων ἑξήκοντα of or weighing 60 talents, Decr. ap. D. 18.92, cf. Plb.24.1.7, IG2.555.10, al.: hence of value,

    θύεν αἶγα ἀ. δραχμᾶν εἴκοσι GDI3707

     ([place name] Cos);

    κρᾶσις ἀ. τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη καὶ ἀ. τῆς λύπης Pl.Phd. 59a

    ; so, by an extension of this use, εἰδεχθής τις ἀ. τοῦ προσώπου ugly of countenance, Thphr.Char.28.4;

    θῆλυν ἀ. χροιῆς Theoc.16.49

    ;

    σεμνὸς ἀ. τοῦ σχήματος Luc.DMort.10.8

    .
    3 of the instrument from or by which a thing is done, τοὺς.. πέφνεν ἀπ' ἀργυρέοιο βιοῖο by arrow shot from silver bow, Il.24.605;

    τόξου ἄπο κρατεροῦ ὀλέκοντα φάλαγγας 8.279

    ;

    ἐμῆς ἀπὸ χειρός 10.371

    , 11.675; so

    ἀ. χειρὸς ἐργάζεσθαι μεγάλα Luc.Hist.Conscr.29

    ; γυμνάζεσθαι ἀ. σκελῶν, χειρῶν, τραχήλου, X.Lac.5.9;

    μάχεσθαι ἀ. ἄκοντος Str.17.3.7

    ;

    ἡ ἀ. τοῦ ξίφους μάχη D.S.5.29

    ;

    βάπτειν τὸν δάκτυλον ἀ. τοῦ αἵματος LXX Le.4.7

    .
    4 of the person from whom an act comes, i.e. by whom it is done,

    οὐδὲν μέγα ἔργον ἀπ' αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο Hdt.1.14

    ;

    ζήτησιν ἀ. σφέων γενέσθαι Id.2.54

    ;

    ἐπράχθη οὐδὲν ἀπ' αὐτῶν ἔργον ἀξιόλογον Th.1.17

    , cf. 6.61;

    ἀ. τινος ὄνασθαι Pl.R. 528a

    , etc.; so τἀπ' ἐμοῦ, τἀπὸ σοῦ, E.Tr.74, S.OC 1628;

    τὰ ἀ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων Th.1.127

    ; in later Greek freq. of the direct agent, Plb.1.34.8, Str.5.4.12, D.H.9.12, Ev.Luc.9.22, J.AJ20.8.10, etc.; in codd. this may sts. be due to confusion with ὑπό, but cf. PMag.Par.1.256, BGU 1185.26(Aug.), SIG820.8(Ephesus, i A. D.), etc.
    5 of the source from which life, power, etc., are sustained,

    ζῆν ἀπ' ὕλης ἀγρίης Hdt.1.203

    ; ἀ. κτήνεων καὶ ἰχθύων ib. 216;

    ἀ. πολέμου Id.5.6

    ;

    ἀπ' ἐλαχίστων χρημάτων X.Mem.1.2.14

    ;

    ἀ. τῆς ἀγορᾶς Id.An.6.1.1

    ;

    τρέφειν τὸ ναυτικὸν ἀ. τῶν νήσων Id.HG4.8.9

    , cf. Th.1.99;

    ἀ. τῶν κοινῶν πλουτεῖν Ar.Pl. 569

    , cf. D.24.124;

    ἀ. μικρῶν εὔνους.. γεγένησαι Ar.Eq. 788

    , cf. D.18.102;

    ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι

     quaestum corpore facere,

    Plu. Tim.14

    .
    6 of the cause, means, or occasion from, by, or because of which a thing is done,

    ἀ. τούτου κριοπρόσωπον τὤγαλμα τοῦ Διὸς ποιεῦσι Hdt.2.42

    ; ἀ. τινος ἐπαινεῖσθαι, θαυμάζεσθαι, ὠφελεῖσθαι, Th.2.25,6.12, X.Cyr.1.1.2;

    ἀ. τῶν ξυμφορῶν διαβάλλεσθαι Th.5.17

    ;

    τὴν ἐπωνυμίαν ἔχειν ἀ. τινος Id.1.46

    ;

    ἀ. λῃστείας τὸν βίον ἔχειν X.An. 7.7.9

    ;

    ἀπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων κρίνειν D.2.27

    ; ἀ. τοῦ πάθους in consequence of.., Th.4.30;

    βλάπτειν τινὰ ἀ. τινος Id.7.29

    ;

    κατασκευάσαντα τὸ πλοῖον ἀφ' ὧν ὑπελάμβανε σωθήσεσθαι D.18.194

    ; τρόπαιον ἀ. τινος εἱστήκει on occasion of his defeat, Id.19.320; τλήμων οὖσ' ἀπ' εὐτόλμου

    φρενός A.Ag. 1302

    , cf. 1643; ἀ. δικαιοσύνης by reason of it (v. l. for ὑπό), Hdt.7.164; ἀ. τῶν αὐτῶν λημμάτων on the same scale of profits, D.3.34, etc.; for ὅσον ἀ. βοῆς ἕνεκα, v. ἕνεκα: hence in half adverbial usages, ἀ. σπουδῆς in earnest, eagerly, Il.7.359; ἀ. τοῦἴσου, ἀ. τῆς ἴσης, or ἀπ' ἴσης, equally, Th.1.99,15, D.14.6, etc.;

    ἀπ' ὀρθῆς καὶ δικαίας τῆς ψυχῆς Id.18.298

    ;

    ἀ. ἀντιπάλου παρασκευῆς Th.1.91

    ; ἀ. τοῦ προφανοῦς openly, ib.35; ἀ. τοῦ εὐθέος straightforwardly, Id.3.43; ἀ. τοῦ αὐτομάτου of free-will, Pl.Prt. 323c; ἀ. γλώσσης by word of mouth, Hdt.1.123 (but also, from hearsay, A.Ag. 813);

    ἀ. στόματος Pl.Tht. 142d

    ; ἀπ' ὄψεως at sight, Lys.16.19; ἀ. χειρὸς λογίζεσθαι on your fingers, Ar.V. 656;

    πεύθομαι δ' ἀπ' ὀμμάτων νόστον A.Ag. 988

    ; ὀμμάτων ἄπο in the public gaze, E.Med. 216;

    ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου ἄρχοντας καθίστασθαι X.Mem.1.2.9

    ;

    ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου Th.8.66

    , cf. IG1.9;

    τοὺς ἀ. τοῦ κυάμου δισχιλίους ἄνδρας Arist.Ath.24.3

    ; τριηράρχους αἱρεῖσθαι ἀ. τῆς οὐσίας Decr. ap. D.18.106; ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ from oneself, on one's own account, Th.8.6, etc.;

    ἀφ' ἑαυτοῦ γνώμης Id.4.68

    ; ἀ. συνθήματος, ἀ. παραγγέλματος, by agreement, by word of command, Hdt.5.74, Th.8.99; ἀ. σάλπιγγος by sound of trumpet, X.Eq.Mag.3.12 (s.v.l.); ἐπίτροπος ἀ. τῶν λόγων, = Lat. procurator a rationibus, Ann.Epigr..1913.143a (Ephesus, ii A. D.).
    7 of the object spoken of, τὰ ἀ. τῆς νήσου οἰκότα ἐστί the things told from or of the island.., Hdt.4.195, cf. 54, 7.195;

    νόμος κείμενος ἀ. τῶν τεχνῶν Ar.Ra. 762

    .
    B in Arc., Cypr., ἀπύ takes dat., ἀπὺ τᾷ [ἁμέρᾳ] IG5(2).6 ([place name] Tegea);

    ἀπὺ τᾷ ζᾷ Inscr.Cypr.135.8

     H. ([place name] Idalion).
    2 in later Greek ἀπό is found c. acc., PLond.1.124.30 (iv/v A. D.).
    C in Hom. frequent with Verbs in tmesi, as Il.5.214, etc., and sts. in Prose, as Hdt.8.89.
    1 asunder, as ἀποκόπτω, ἀπολύω, ἀποτέμνω: and hence, away, off, as ἀποβάλλω, ἀποβαίνω; denoting, remoual of an accusation, as ἀπολογέομαι, ἀποψηφίζομαι.
    2 finishing off, completing, ἀπεργάζομαι, ἀπανδρόω, ἀπανθρωπίζω, ἀπογλαυκόω.
    3 ceasing from, leaving off, as ἀπαλγέω, ἀποκηδεύω, ἀπολοφύρομαι, ἀποζέω, ἀπανθίζω, ἀφυβρίζω.
    4 back again, as ἀποδίδωμι, ἀπολαμβάνω, ἀπόπλους: also, in full, or what is one's own, as ἀπέχω, ἀπολαμβάνω: freq. it only strengthens the sense of the simple.
    5 by way of abuse, as in ἀποκαλέω.
    6 almost = ἀ- priv.; sts. with Verbs, as ἀπαυδάω, ἀπαγορεύω; more freq. with Adjectives, as ἀποχρήματος, ἀπότιμος, ἀπόσιτος, ἀπόφονος.
    E ἄπο, by anastrophe for ἀπό, when it follows its Noun, as

    ὀμμάτων ἄπο S.El. 1231

    , etc.; never in Prose.
    2 ἄπο for ἄπεστι, Semon.1.20, Timocr.9.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀπό

  • 16 ἄν

    ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,
    A

    εἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2

    , 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.
    A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.
    I WITH INDICATIVE:
    1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,
    a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh.

    καί κε θάμ' ἐνθάδ' ἐόντες ἐμισγόμεθ' Od.4

    . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,

    εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;

    εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3

    .
    c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.
    d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.
    2 with [tense] fut. ind.:
    a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;

    ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80

    ; so in Lyr.,

    μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68

    , cf. I.6(5).59.
    b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,

    σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140

    ;

    οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d

    , cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;

    οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36

     (corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.
    II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future,

    οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις 3.54

    , al.
    III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):
    a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:

    ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28

    ;

    οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b

    :—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.
    b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;

    ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116

    , cf. D.1.26, al.
    c with protasis understood:

    φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269

    ; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447;

    οὐδ' ἂν δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι S.Ant. 240

    , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time,

    Τυδεΐδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη Il.5.85

    .
    d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.
    e in questions, expressing a wish:

    τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100

    , cf.A.Ag. 1448;

    πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389

    : hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty,

    τλαίης κεν Μενελάῳ ἐπιπροέμεν ταχὺν ἰόν Il.4.94

    ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.
    f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.
    g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis:

    ῥεῖα θεός γ' ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι Od.3.231

    , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,

    θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186

    ;

    τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605

    .
    h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.
    IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,

    τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b

    ) representing ind. or opt.:
    1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.
    2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:
    a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.
    b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.
    3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:
    a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.
    b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.
    4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional,

    ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιήσοντος ἄλλα Pl.Ap. 30c

     (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,

    νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8

    , cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.
    I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, once

    εἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288

    , twice

    εἴπερ ἄν 5.224

    , 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.
    2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (

    ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412

    ), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.
    3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,

    σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32

    ;

    ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824

    ;

    ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e

    ;

    μηχανητέον ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ Grg. 481a

     (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.

    ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156

     ( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.
    II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.

    εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597

    ),

    εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353

    ; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as in

    ὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81

    .
    2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;

    ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6

    :—similarly after a preceding opt.,

    οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d

    .
    III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:
    1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:

    αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213

    :—so with relat.,

    οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175

    .
    2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,

    εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526

    ; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.
    IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, as

    ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56

    ;

    ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136

     (iv A. D.);

    ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19

    ; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.
    C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;

    εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295

    ; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;

    διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b

    : inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.
    D GENERAL REMARKS:
    I POSITION OF ἄν.
    1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; as

    εἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281

    -4; rarely by τις, as

    ὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14

    :—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, as

    εἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355

    , cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,

    ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45

    ;

    ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420

    : also

    ὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e

    , cf. 850a;

    ὅπου τὸ πάλαι λεγόμενον ἂν γίγνηται 739c

    .
    2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.
    3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;

    οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2

    ; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;

    οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b

    ;

    οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12

    .
    4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,

    ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax

     <*>37.
    II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,

    ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333

    , cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15;

    ἀφανεῖς ἂν ὄντες οὐκ ἂν ὑμνήθημεν ἄν E.Tr. 1244

    , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.
    2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.
    III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι)

    , εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935

    :—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)

    εἰ.. Isoc.10.48

    :—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.
    IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:

    πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049

    : even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,
    A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,

    ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b

    ; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;

    ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4

    : not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄν (D), shortened from ἄνα, v. sub ἀνά G.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄν

  • 17 ἐντολικός

    A of or for a command, νόμος prob. in CIG2712.8 (Mylasa, v A. D.);

    ἐπιστολἴδιον POxy.1677.5

     (iii A. D.).
    II Subst. -κόν, τό, authorization, power of attorney, PFlor.142.2 (iii A. D.), etc.
    2 prescription, recipe, BGU953.1 (iii/iv A. D.), dub. sens. in POxy.1775.13 (iv A. D.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐντολικός

  • 18 ἵνα

    A Adv.,
    I of Place,
    1 in that place, there, once in Hom.,

    ἵ. γάρ σφιν ἐπέφραδον ἠγερέθεσθαι Il.10.127

     (acc.to Eust.).
    2 elsewh. relat., in which place, where, 2.558, Od.9.136, Hdt.2.133,9.27,54, Pi.O.1.95, B.10.79, A.Pr.21, al., S.El.22, 855, Ar.Ra. 1231, etc.: rarely in [dialect] Att. Prose, Lys.13.72 (v. infr.), Pl.Ap. 17c, Phlb. 61b; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (sc. ἐστίν) IG22.1407.13: rare in later Greek, Arr.An.1.3.2, Luc.Cont.22, Ind.3: with particles,

    ἵ. τε Il.20.478

    ;

    ἵ. περ 24.382

    , Od.13.364, Lys. l.c.; ἵν' ἄν c. subj., wherever, S.OC 405, E. Ion 315; as indirect interrog., Hdt.1.179, 2.150, E.Hec. 1008.
    b after Hom., like other Advs. of Place, c. gen.,

    ἵ. τῆς χώρης Hdt.1.98

    ; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, Id.1.213;

    οὐδ' ὁρᾶν ἵν' ἐ̄ κακοῦ S.OT 367

    ; ἵν' ἕσταμεν χρείας ib. 1442;

    ἵν' ἦμεν ἄτης Id.El. 936

    ;

    ὁρᾷς ἵν' ἐσμὲν αὐτοῦ πέρι τῆς ἀπορίας Pl.Sph. 243b

    .
    c with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.4.821, al.;

    ὁρᾷς ἵν' ἥκεις S.OT 687

    , al., Din.2.10;

    ιναπερ ὥρμητο Th. 4.74

    .
    II of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, Od.6.27; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, Antipho 6.9.
    2 = ἐάν, dub. in Il.7.353 (v.l. ἵν' ἄν, cf. Sch.), Archil. 74.7 codd., v.l. in Din.1.1, and Pl.Chrm. 176b.
    B Final Conj., that, in order that, from Hom. downwards, mostly first word in the clause, but sts. preceded by an emphatic word, Pl.Chrm. 169d;

    ἵ. δή Il.7.26

    , 23.207, Hdt.1.29, Pl.R. 420e, 610c: never with ἄν or κε (if found, these particles belong to the Verb, as in Od.12.156, E.IA 1579).
    I general usage:
    1 with subj.,
    a after primary tenses of ind., also subj. and imper.: [tense] pres. ind., Il.3.252, Od.2.111, X.Mem.3.2.3, Cyr.1.2.11, Isoc.3.2: [tense] pf. ind., Il.1.203, Isoc.4.129: [tense] fut., Od.2.307,4.591, X.Cyr.1.2.15; subj., S.OT 364; imper., Il.19.348,al., A.Pr.61, S.Ph. 880, Ar.Ra. 297, Pl.R. 341b, Men. 71d.
    b after historical tenses, in similes, where the [tense] aor. is gnomic, Od.5.490 ( αὔοι codd.); where [tense] aor. is treated as equiv. to [tense] pf., Il.9.99, Od.8.580, Hdt.5.91, Lys.1.4, D.9.26: when the purpose is regarded from the point of view of the speaker's present,

    σὲ παῖδα ποιεύμην ἵ. μοι.. λοιγὸν ἀμύνῃς Il.9.495

    , cf. Hdt.1.29, 6.100, Th.1.44, al., Lys.1.11,12,al.
    c after opt. and ἄν, when opt. with οὐκ ἄν is used with sense of imper., Il.24.264, Od.6.58; after βουλοίμην ἄν.., Lys.7.12.
    d after [tense] impf. with ἄν, D.23.7.
    2 with opt.,
    a after historical tenses, Il.5.3, Od.3.2, A. Th. 215, Lys.3.11, Pl.Prt. 314c, etc.: after the historical [tense] pres., E. Hec.11: sts. both moods, subj. and opt., follow in consecutive clauses, Od.3.77, Hdt.8.76,9.51, D.23.93,49.14.
    b after opt., Od.18.369, S.Ph. 325;

    βούλοιντ' ἂν ἡμᾶς ἐξολωλέναι, ἵνα.. λάβοιεν Ar. Pax 413

    .
    c rarely after primary tenses, by a shifting of the point of view, Od.17.250, Ar.Ra.24, Pl.R. 410c.
    3 with past tenses of ind.,
    a after unfulfilled wishes, Id.Cri. 44d.
    b after ind. with ἄν, to express a consequence which has not followed or cannot follow, S.OT 1389, Pl.Men. 89b, D.29.17: esp. after ἐβουλόμην ἄν.., Ar. V. 961, Lys.4.3.
    c after such Verbs as ἐχρῆν, ἔδει, E.Hipp. 647, Pl.Prt. 335c, Smp. 181e, Euthd. 304e, Isoc.9.5, D.24.48, Men.349.5, etc.: whenan unfulfilled obligation is implied, τεθαύμακα ὅτι οὐκ εἶπεν ( = ἔδει εἰπεῖν)

    .. ἵ... Pl.Tht. 161c

    ; ἀντὶ τοῦ κοσμεῖν ( = δέον κοσμεῖν)

    .. ἵ... D.36.47

    .
    d after [tense] pres. ind. in general statements (including the past),

    οὐδὲ γὰρ τὸ εἶναι ἔχει ἡ ὕλη, ἱ. ἀγαθοῦ ταύτῃ μετεῖχεν Plot.1.8.5

    .
    4 ἵ. μή as the neg. of ἵνα, that not, Il.19.348, etc.
    II special usages:
    1 like ὅπως, after Verbs of command and entreaty, is common only in later Gr. (but cf. Od.3.327 with ib.19), ἀξιοῦν ἵ... Decr. ap. D.18.155;

    δεήσεσθαι ἵ... D.H.1.83

    ;

    παρακαλεῖν ἵ... Arr.Epict.3.23.27

    : freq. in NT,

    ἐκήρυξαν ἵ. μετανοήσωσιν Ev.Marc.6.12

    , al.; of will, ὅσα ἐὰν θέλητε ἵ. ποιῶσιν.. ib.25: hence ἵ. c. subj. stands for infin., ἐν τούτῳ ἵ. καρπὸν φέρητε ( = ἐν τῷ φέρειν) Ev.Jo.15.8, etc.;

    πρῶτόν ἐστιν ἵ. κοιμηθῶ Arr.Epict.1.10.8

    , cf. M.Ant.8.29; also for ὥστε, LXX Ge.22.14,al., Plu.2.333a, Porph.Abst.2.33, etc.
    2 because, ἵ. ἀναγνῶ ἐτιμήθην I was honoured because I read, Anon. ap. A.D.Synt.266.5, cf. Conj.243.21, Choerob.in Theod.2.257, al.; not found in literature.
    3 elliptical usages,
    a where the purpose of the utterance is stated, Ζεὺς ἔσθ', ἵν' εἰδῇς 'tis Zeus,— [I tell thee this] that thou may'st know it, S.Ph. 989;

    ἵ. μὴ εἴπω ὅτι οὐδεμιᾷ Pl.R. 507d

    ;

    ἵ. συντέμω D.45.5

    ;

    ἵν' ἐκ τούτων ἄρξωμαι Id.21.43

    ; ἵ. δῶμεν.. granted that.., S.E.P.2.34, cf. 1.79.
    b in commands, introducing a principal sentence, ἵ. συντάξῃς order him.., PCair.Zen. 240.12 (iii B.C.);

    ἵ. λαλήσῃς PSI4.412.1

     (iii B.C.);

    ἵ. ἐλθὼν ἐπιθῇς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῇ Ev.Marc.5.23

    ,cf. 2 Ep.Cor.8.7, LXX 2 Ma.1.9, Arr.Epict.4.1.41, Did. ap. Sch.S.OC 156.
    c ἵ. τί (sc. γένηται); to what end? either abs. or as a question, Ar.Ec. 719; or with a Verb following, Id. Pax 409, cf. Pl.Ap. 26d, etc.; ἵ. δὴ τί; Ar.Nu. 1192.
    d in indignant exclamations, to think that.. !

    Σωκράτης ἵ. πάθῃ ταῦτα Arr.Epict.1.29.16

    .
    III in later Gr. with ind., LXXEx.1.11,al., Ep.Gal.2.4, 4.17, etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἵνα

  • 19 ὁμοκλή

    Grammatical information: f.
    Meaning: `loud (threatening, scolding) acclamation, command' (Hom., Hes. Sc.; also Emp. [- έων], Pi. [- αῖς], A. Fr. 57,5 = 71,5 [άν]); `attack, onset' (hell.; false duced from Π 147?).
    Other forms: (ὀ-?, s.below).
    Derivatives: Besides, prob. as denominative, the more usual ὁμοκλ-άω, - έω (ὀ-) in ipf. 3. sg. ὁμόκλα (Σ 156, Ω 248), 3 pl. ὁμόκλ-εον, 1 pl. - έομεν (Ο 658 a.o., ω 173), aor. ὁμοκλῆσαι (Hom., S. El. 712), iter. ipf. ὁμοκλήσασκε (Β 199) `to shout (threateningly), to call, to exhort, to warn'; from there ὁμοκλη-τήρ, - ῆρος m. `shouter, warner' (Μ 273, Ψ 452), f. - τειρα (Lyc. 1337).
    Origin: XX [etym. unknown]
    Etymology: As the elided ὑπ' ὀμοκλῆς (e.g. Hes. Sc. 341), κέκλετ' ὀμοκλήσας (v. l. Υ 365) point to orig. lenis (Wackernagel Unt. 47 A. 1), one doubted clearly already in antiquity the hard to understand connection with ὁμός etc. In ὀμο- Jacobsohn Phil. 67, 509ff., KZ 42, 160 n. 1, Χάριτες F. Leo (1911) 443 f. wanted to find a counterpart of Skt. áma- m. `violence, pressure, turbulence', Av. ama- m. `power (to attack), strength'; so ὀμο-κλή prop. as determinative comp. "(attack)-, cry" (?). The 2. member, in any case to καλέω, can be a root-noun (Brugmann Grundr.2 II: 1,140, Risch $ 72b); but it can also be explained as an ā-abstract ὀμο-κλ-ά̄ (: *ὀμο-κλ-ός like νεο-γν-ός; cf. on μεσόδμη) (Fraenkel Nom. ag. 1, 8 n. 2 with Jacobsohn l.c.), in which case the laryngeal must have been lost. For the latter interpretation pleads ὁμοκλάν in A. (s. above), as Greek as monosyll. zero grade only knows κλη- (s. on καλέω); an artificial Dorism (Jacobsohn as alternative) is however not excluded. -- On the variation - άω: - έω in the verb, which can be phonetic, s. Schwyzer 242, Chantraine Gramm. hom. 1, 361.
    Page in Frisk: 2,389

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > ὁμοκλή

  • 20 δίδωμι

    δίδωμι (Hom.+) by-form διδῶ (B-D-F §94, 1; Rob. 311f) Rv 3:9 (δίδω Tregelles, δίδωμι v.l.), 3 sg. διδοῖ (GrBar 7:2), 3 pl. διδόασι; impf. 3 sg. ἐδίδου, ἐδίδει (Hs 6, 2, 7; cp. Mk 4:8 cod. W), 3 pl. ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδοσαν J 19:3; ptc. διδῶν (Hs 8, 3, 3); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα, subj. 3 sg. δώσῃ J 17:2; Rv 8:3 v.l. (on this W-S.§14, 9; B-D-F §95, 1; Rob. 308f), 1 pl. δώσωμεν Mk 6:37 v.l., 3 pl. δώσωσιν Rv 4:9 v.l.; pf. δέδωκα; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν (and without augm. δεδώκειν Mk 14:44; Lk 19:15; J 11:57); 2 aor. subj. 3 sg. δῷ J 15:16 (δώῃ v.l.); also in the form δώῃ Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 (in both δῷ as v.l.): in all these cases read δώῃ subj., not δῴη opt., s. below; δοῖ Mk 8:37 (B-D-F §95, 2; Mlt. 55; Rdm.2 97f and Glotta 7, 1916, 21ff; GKilpatrick in Festschrift JSchmid ’63, 135), pl. δῶμεν, δῶτε, δῶσιν; 2 aor. opt. 3 sg. Hellenist. (also LXX) δῴη for δοίη Ro 15:5; 2 Th 3:16; 2 Ti 1:16, 18 (on Eph 1:17; 2 Ti 2:25 s. above); 2 aor. impv. δός, δότε, inf. δοῦναι, ptc. δούς; pf. δέδωκα LXX. Pass.: 1 fut. δοθήσομαι (W-S. §14, 8ff); 1 aor. ἐδόθην; pf. δέδομαι.
    ① to give as an expression of generosity, give, donate as a gen. principle: μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν it is more blessed to give than to receive Ac 20:35 (Theophyl. Sim., Ep. 42 τὸ διδόναι ἢ τὸ λαβεῖν οἰκειότερον); cp. 1 Cl 2:1; Hm 2:4ff (the contrast δίδωμι … λαμβάνω is frequently found: Epicharmus, Fgm. 273 Kaibel; Com. Fgm. Adesp. 108, 4 K.; Maximus Tyr. 32, 10c ὀλίγα δούς, μεγάλα ἔλαβες; Sir 14:16; Tat. 29, 2).—On the logion Ac 20:35 s. Unknown Sayings 77–81: giving is blessed, not receiving (cp. EHaenchen on Ac 20:35; Aristot., EN 4, 3, 26; Plut., Mor. 173d). S. μᾶλλον 3c. δὸς τοῖς πτωχοῖς give to the poor Mt 19:21 (HvonCampenhausen, Tradition u. Leben ’60, 114–56). τινὶ ἔκ τινος give someone some (of a substance: Tob 4:16; Ezk 48:12) Mt 25:8. S. also 7:11; 14:7.
    ② to give someth. out, give, bestow, grant δ. δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα put a ring on the finger Lk 15:22 (cp. Esth 3:10—δίδωμί τι εἰς τ. χεῖρα also Aristoph., Nub. 506; Herodas 3, 70). give τινί τι someth. to someone τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν Mt 7:6 (Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 33 τὰ ἔγκατα τοῖς κυσὶ δότε).—A certificate of divorce to one’s wife 5:31 (Dt 24:1; conversely of the wife Just., A II, 2, 6 ῥεπούδιον δοῦσα); without dat. 19:7. Of bread (w. dat. or acc. somet. to be supplied fr. the context) 26:26f; Mk 2:26; 14:22; Lk 6:4; 11:7f; 22:19; J 21:13 (difft. Mt 14:19; 15:36; Mk 6:41; 8:6 the disciples transfer to others what they have received). W. inf. foll. δ. τινὶ φαγεῖν give someone someth. to eat Mt 14:16; 25:35, 42; Mk 5:43; 6:37; J 6:31 al. (cp. Gen 28:20; Ex 16:8, 15; Lev 10:17); someth. to drink Mt 27:34; Mk 15:23; J 4:7; Rv 16:6 (Hdt. 4, 172, 4; Aristoph., Pax 49; Jos., Ant. 2, 64; schol. on Nicander, Alexiph. 146 δὸς πιεῖν τί τινι, without dat. 198; PGM 13, 320 δὸς πεῖν[=πιεῖν]; Jos., Ant. 2, 64).—τὰς ῥάβδους GJs 9:1.—Lk 15:29 (Hipponax 43 Deg.).
    ③ to express devotion, give δόξαν δ. θεῷ give God the glory, i.e. praise, honor, thanks (Josh 7:19; Ps 67:35; 1 Esdr 9:8; 2 Ch 30:8 and oft.) Lk 17:18; J 9:24 (practically=promise under oath to tell the truth); Ac 12:23 al. δόξαν καὶ τιμήν (2 Ch 32:33) give glory and honor Rv 4:9. Through a sacrificial offering θυσίαν δ. bring an offering Lk 2:24 (cp. Jos., Ant. 7, 196 θυσίαν ἀποδοῦναι τ. θεῷ).
    ④ to cause to happen, esp. in ref. to physical phenomena, produce, make, cause, give fig. extension of mng. 1 ὑετὸν δ. (3 Km 17:14; Job 5:10; Zech 10:1; PsSol 5:9) yield rain Js 5:18; send rain Ac 14:17. τέρατα cause wonders to appear Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3). Of heavenly bodies φέγγος δ. give light, shine Mt 24:29; Mk 13:24 (cp. Is 13:10). Of a musical instrument φωνὴν δ. (cp. Ps 17:14; 103:12; Jdth 14:9; Pind., N. 5, 50b [93]) produce a sound 1 Cor 14:7f.
    ⑤ to put someth. in care of another, entrust
    ⓐ of things entrust τινί τι someth. to someone money Mt 25:15; Lk 19:13, 15; the keys of the kgdm. Mt 16:19; perh. Lk 12:48. W. εἰς τὰς χεῖρας added J 13:3 (cp. Gen 39:8; Is 22:21; 29:12 al.) or ἐν τῇ χειρί τινος 3:35 (cp. Jdth 9:9; Da 1:2; 7:25 Theod.; 1 Macc 2:7). Of spiritual things J 17:8, 14; Ac 7:38.
    ⓑ of pers. τινά τινι entrust someone to another’s care J 6:37, 39; 17:6, 9, 12, 24; Hb 2:13 (Is 8:18).
    ⓐ of payment pay, give τινί τι Mt 20:4; 26:15; 28:12; Mk 14:11; Lk 22:5; Rv 11:18. Fig. repay someone (Mélanges Nicole, var. contributors, JNicole Festschr. 1905, p. 246 [HvanHerwerden=PLips 40 III, 3 p. 129] λίθῳ δέδωκεν τῷ υἱῷ μου; Ps 27:4) Rv 2:23. Of taxes, tribute, rent, etc. τινὶ ἀπό τινος pay rent of someth. Lk 20:10 (cp. 1 Esdr 6:28). τὶ pay (up), give someth. Mt 16:26; 27:10; Mk 8:37; δ. κῆνσον, φόρον καίσαρι pay tax to the emperor (Jos., Bell. 2, 403) Mt 22:17; Mk 12:14; Lk 20:22. Of inheritance pay out a portion of property Lk 15:12.
    ⓑ as commercial t.t. for bookkeeping λόγον δ. render account (POxy 1281, 9 [21 A.D.]; PStras 32, 9 δότω λόγον; cp. Phil 4:15) Ro 14:12.
    ⓒ of a bank deposit, equivalent to τιθέναι put, place, deposit ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν put money in the bank Lk 19:23.
    ⑦ appoint to special responsibility, appoint (Num 14:4) κριτάς judges Ac 13:20; w. double acc. appoint someone someth. (PLille 28, II [III B.C.] αὐτοῖς ἐδώκαμεν μεσίτην Δωρίωνα) τοὺϚ μὲν ἀποστόλους some (to be) apostles Eph 4:11. τινὰ κεφαλήν make someone head 1:22. Also δ. τινὰ εἴς τι B 14:7 (Is 42:6).
    ⑧ to cause someth. to happen, give (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 106 δ. χρόνον εἰς μετάνοιαν) δ. γνῶσιν σωτηρίας= to give (his people) knowledge of salvation = to tell (his people) how to be saved Lk 1:77.
    ⑨ to bear as a natural product, yield, produce of a field and its crops καρπὸν δ. yield fruit (Ps 1:3) Mt 13:8; Mk 4:7f; fig. ἔδωκεν μοὶ Κύριος καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ GJs 6:3 (Pr 11:30).
    ⑩ to dedicate oneself for some purpose or cause, give up, sacrifice τὸ σῶμά μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον my body, given up for you Lk 22:19 (cp. Thu. 2, 43, 2; Libanius, Declam. 24, 23 Förster οἱ ἐν Πύλαις ὑπὲρ ἐλευθερίας τ. Ἑλλήνων δεδωκότες τὰ σώματα; of Menas δ. ἀπροφασίστως ἑαυτόν ‘gave of himself unstintingly’ OGI 339, 19f; Danker, Benefactor 321–23; for use of δ. in a testamentary context cp. Diog. L. 5, 72); ἑαυτὸν (τὴν ψυχὴν) δ. give oneself up, sacrifice oneself (ref. in Nägeli 56; 1 Macc 6:44; 2:50) w. dat. 2 Cor 8:5. λύτρον ἀντι πολλῶν give oneself up as a ransom for many Mt 20:28; Mk 10:45 (ἀντί 3). Also ἀντίλυτρον ὑπέρ τινος 1 Ti 2:6. ὐπέρ τινος for or because of a person or thing J 10:15 v.l.; Gal 1:4; Tit 2:14; AcPl Ha 8, 24 (on the form of these passages s. KRomaniuk, NovT 5, ’62, 55–76). ἑαυτὸν δ. τῷ θανάτῳ ISm 4:2 (cp. Just., A I, 21, 2 πυρί); δ. ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θηρίον face the beast Hv 4, 1, 8.
    ⑪ to cause (oneself) to go, go, venture somewhere (cp. our older ‘betake oneself’) (Polyb. 5, 14, 9; Diod S 5, 59, 4; 14, 81, 2; Jos., Ant. 7, 225; 15, 244) εἰς τὸ θέατρον Ac 19:31; εἰς τὴν ἔρημον GJs 1:4.
    ⑫ to use an oracular device, draw/cast lots Ac 1:26.
    ⑬ to grant by formal action, grant, allow, freq. of God (cp. 7 above) ἐξουσίαν δ. (Hippol., Ref. 5, 26, 21 grant someone the power or authority, give someone the right, etc. (cp. TestJob 20:3; Jos., Ant. 2, 90, Vi. 71) Mt 9:8; 28:18; 2 Cor 13:10; Rv 9:3; 1 Cl 61:1; τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω τινός tread on someth. Lk 10:19. τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ γράψαι τὴν ἱστορίαν ταύτην the ability to write this account GJs 25:1. ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἐπί Lk 9:1 (cp. Just., D. 30, 3 ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ δύναμιν). ταῦτά σοι πάντα δώσω i.e. put them under your control Mt 4:9 of the devil. Simple δ. w. inf. (Appian, Liby. 19 §78 ἢν [=ἐὰν] ὁ θεὸς δῷ ἐπικρατῆσαι 106 §499) δέδοται it is given, granted to someone γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια to know the secrets Mt 13:11; cp. ἡ δοθεῖσα αὐτῷ γνῶσις B 9:8 (Just., D. 7, 3 εἰ μή τῳ θεός δῷ συνιέναι) ἔδωκεν ζωὴν ἔχειν he has granted (the privilege) of having life J 5:26. μετὰ παρρησίας λαλεῖν to speak courageously Ac 4:29 and oft. Rather freq. the inf. is to be supplied fr. the context (Himerius, Or. 38 [4], 8 εἰ θεὸς διδοίη=if God permits) οἷς δέδοται sc. χωρεῖν Mt 19:11. ἦν δεδομένον σοι sc. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. W. acc. and inf. foll. (Appian, Mithrid. 11, §37; Heliodorus 5, 12, 2 δώσεις με πιστεύειν) οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν you will not permit your holy one to see corruption Ac 2:27; 13:35 (both Ps 15:10). ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι granted that he should be plainly seen 10:40. δὸς … ῥαγήναι τὰ δέσμα grant that our chains be broken AcPl Ha 3,11f. Pregnant constr.: grant, order (Diod S 9, 12, 2 διδ. λαβεῖν=permit to; 19, 85, 3 τὶ=someth.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 125 §524 ὁ καιρὸς ἐδίδου=the opportunity permitted; Biogr. p. 130 ἐδίδου θάπτειν τ. ἄνδρα) ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἵνα μὴ ἀποκτείνωσιν orders were given them not to kill Rv 9:5; cp. 19:8.—Of an oath w. double inf. Lk 1:73f. S. also 17 below.
    ⑭ to cause to come into being, institute περιτομὴν δ. institute circumcision B 9:7.
    ⑮ give up, someth. that has been under one’s control for a relatively long time, give up, give back ἡ θάλασσα τ. νεκρούς the sea gave up its dead Rv 20:13.
    ⑯ to proffer someth., extend, offer χεῖρα hold out one’s hand (to someone) Ac 9:41 (cp. 1 Macc 6:58; 2 Macc 12:11; Jos., Bell. 6, 318). (τὸν) μαστὸν τῇ παῖδι GJs 5:2; 6:3.
    ⑰ In many phrases this word relates to an activity or an abstract object, and with tr. freq. determined by the noun object; cp. 13 above.
    ⓐ of humans: of a plan conceived in a meeting give counsel or advice: δ. for ποιεῖν (cp. κατά A2b β and s. s.v. συμβούλιον), which is read by some mss., in συμβούλιον δ. conspired (against Jesus) Mk 3:6. ἀφορμὴν δ. give an occasion (for someth.) 2 Cor 5:12; Hm 4, 1, 11; μαρτυρίαν δ. give testimony 1 Cl 30:7; δ. τὸ μαρτύριον bear witness AcPl Ha 4, 28; γνώμην δ. give an opinion 1 Cor 7:25; 2 Cor 8:10; ἐγκοπὴν δ. cause a hindrance 1 Cor 9:12; ἐντολὴν δ. command, order J 11:57; 12:49; 1J 3:23; ἐντολὴν καινὴν δ. give a new commandment J 13:34; εὔσημον λόγον δ. speak plainly or intelligibly 1 Cor 14:9; παραγγελίαν δ. give an instruction 1 Th 4:2; δ. τὴν ἐν [κυρίῳ σφραγίδα] seal in the Lord AcPl Ha 11, 23 (restored after the Coptic); προσκοπὴν δ. put an obstacle in (someone’s) way 2 Cor 6:3; δ. ἐκδίκησιν take vengeance 2 Th 1:8; ῥάπισμα δ. τινί slap someone J 18:22; 19:3; σημεῖον δ. give a sign Mt 26:48; τόπον δ. τινί make room for someone (Plut., Gai. Gracch. 840 [13, 3]) Lk 14:9; fig. leave room for Ro 12:19 (cp. τόπος 4); Eph 4:27. ὑπόδειγμα δ. give an example J 13:15; φίλημα δ. τινί give someone a kiss Lk 7:45.—δὸς ἐργασίαν Lk 12:58 is prob. a Latinism=da operam take pains, make an effort (B-D-F §5, 3b note 9; Rob. 109), which nevertheless penetrated the popular speech (OGI 441, 109 [senatorial decree 81 B.C.]; POxy 742, 11 [colloq. letter 2 B.C.] δὸς ἐργασίαν; PMich 203, 7; 466, 33f [Trajan]; PGiss 11, 16 [118 A.D.]; PBrem 5, 8 [117/119 A.D.]).
    ⓑ esp. oft. of God (Hom. et al.) and Christ: give, grant, impose (of punishments etc.), send, of gifts, peace τινί τι Eph 4:8; 1 Cl 60:4; τινί τινος give someone some of a thing Rv 2:17. Also τινὶ ἔκ τινος 1J 4:13. τὶ εἴς τινα 1 Th 4:8 (Ezk 37:14); εἰς τὰς καρδίας put into the hearts Rv 17:17 (cp. X., Cyr. 8, 2, 20 δ. τινί τι εἰς ψυχήν). Also ἐν τ. καρδίαις δ. (cp. ἐν 3) 2 Cor 1:22; 8:16 (cp. Ezk 36:27). εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν Hb 8:10 (Jer 38: 33); ἐπὶ καρδίας Hb 10:16 (δ. ἐπί w. acc. as Jer 6:21, and s. Jer 38:33 ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν γράψω). W. ἵνα foll. grant that Mk 10:37.—The pass. occurs very oft. in this sense (Plut., Mor. 265d; 277e) Lk 8:10; Rv 6:4; 7:2; 13:7, 14f and oft. ἐκδίκησιν διδόναι τινί inflict punishment on someone 2 Th 1:8; βασανισμὸν καὶ πένθος δ. τινί send torment and grief upon someone Rv 18:7; ὄνομα δ. GJs 6:2, χάριν δ. (Jos., Bell. 7, 325) Js 4:6; 1 Pt 5:5 (both Pr 3:34); GJs 14:2; υἱοθεσίαν AcPl Ha 2, 28; 9,12; ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 2, 30f; μεγαλεῖα 6,13. W. gen. foll. over someone Mt 10:1; Mk 6:7; J 17:2.—B. 749. Schmidt, Syn. 193–203. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δίδωμι

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Power Rangers S.P.D. — Power Rangers: SPD Autre titre francophone Power Rangers: Super Police Delta Titre original Power Rangers: Space Patrol Delta Genre Action Aventure Création Disney Toei Company Réalisation Greg Aronowitz Participants James Napier Kevin Duhaney… …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Command & Conquer: Generals — Command Conquer Generals cover art Developer(s) EA Pacific (Windows) Aspyr Media (Mac OS) …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer: Yuri's Revenge — Developer(s) Westwood Pacific Publisher(s) EA Games Series …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer 3: Kane's Wrath — Developer(s) EA Los Angeles BreakAway Games[1] Publisher(s) …   Wikipedia

  • power — n 1 Power, force, energy, strength, might, puissance mean the ability to exert effort for a purpose. Power is the most general of these terms and denotes an ability to act or be acted upon, to effect something, or to affect or be affected by… …   New Dictionary of Synonyms

  • Power Rangers Zeo — Format Action/Adventure Science fantasy Created by Haim Saban Shuki Levy …   Wikipedia

  • Command & Conquer: Red Alert 3 — Red Alert 3 cover art Developer(s) EA Los Angeles Publisher(s) Elect …   Wikipedia

  • Command \x26 Conquer: Red Alert — Command Conquer: Red Alert Command Conquer: Red Alert Разработчик Westwood Studios Издатель Virg …   Википедия

  • Power Rangers Dino Thunder — Format Action/Adventure Science fantasy Written by Douglas Sloan …   Wikipedia

  • Power to the Edge — refers to the ability of an organization to dynamically synchronize its actions; achieve command and control (C2) agility; and increase the speed of command over a robust, networked grid. The term is most commonly used in relation to military… …   Wikipedia

  • Power Rangers Ninja Storm — Format Action/Adventure Fantasy Written by Douglas Sloan Ann Austen …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»